2001 honda civic owner's manual

！

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer’s staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. YourHonda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

Congratulations Your selection of a 2001 Honda Civic was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

00/08/10 11:51:24 31S5P600_002

－

－

－

－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

00/08/10 11:51:36 31S5P600_003

Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.

ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-ties, and technical information.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new Honda, andhow to contact us for any reason.Refer to your warranty manual fordetailed information.

This section covers severalproblems motorists sometimesexperience, and details how tohandle them.

Tips on cleaning and protectingyour car. Also some things to lookfor if your car ever needs bodyrepairs.

The Maintenance Schedule showsyou when you need to take yourcar to the dealer. There is also alist of things to check andinstructions on how to check them.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park.

What gasoline to use, how tobreak-in your new car, and how to

load luggage and other cargo.

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, and the audiosystem.

Important information about theproper use and care of your car’sseat belts, an overview of theSupplemental Restraint System,and valuable information on howto protect children with childrestraints.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator andgauge, and how to use the controlson the dashboard and steeringcolumn.

A summary of information you needwhen you pull up to the fuel pump.

Contents

...............Your Car at a Glance . 2

....Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

.....................................Index . I

Service Information Summary

.....Instruments and Controls . 57

..............................Driving . 175

Comfort and Convenience............................Features . 107

...................Before Driving . 161

......................Maintenance . 195

................Appearance Care . 255

Taking Care of the.......................Unexpected . 263

.........Technical Information . 291

Warranty and CustomerRelations

........(U.S. and Canada only) . 305

Authorized Manuals.........................(U.S. only) . 311

1

00/08/10 11:51:55 31S5P600_004

Your Car at a Glance

2

AAIIRRBBAAGGSS

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

((PP.. 1100,, 4477))

((PP.. 8888))

((PP.. 8844))

PPOOWWEERRDDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSSWWIITTCCHH

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS((PP.. 9966))

((PP.. 116633))

((PP.. 116644))((PP.. 118800))

((PP.. 117788))

((PP.. 110088))

((PP.. 112211,, 113333,, 114455))

((PP.. 111166,, 112288,, 114400))

00/08/10 11:52:02 31S5P600_005

Your Car at a Glance

3

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS((PP.. 7700,, 7722))

((PP.. 7722,, 7733))

((PP.. 7744))

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR((PP.. 7744))

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSWWIITTCCHHEESS((PP.. 7777))((PP.. 7755))

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLLMMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH((PP.. 7766))

((PP.. 9988))

((PP.. 9999))

00/08/10 11:52:08 31S5P600_006

4

00/08/10 11:52:10 31S5P600_007

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.........................................Airbags . 10

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

..................................Door Locks . 11........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

............................Protecting Adults . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 16....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 18

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

........................Protecting Children . 21All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 21Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 22The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to...............................Children . 22

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 24

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 24

...Additional Safety Precautions . 25General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 26.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.........Protecting Small Children . 34.......Protecting Larger Children . 37

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 41

...Using the Lower Anchorages . 42Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 44..Seat Belt System Components . 44

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 45...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 46

Additional Information About...........................Your Airbags . 48

........................SRS Components . 48How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 48...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50

How the SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 51

How The Side Airbag Indicator............................Light Works . 52.............................Airbag Service . 53

...Additional Safety Precautions . 53.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

...................................Safety Labels . 55

Driver and Passenger Safety


5

00/08/10 11:52:15 31S5P600_008

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

16

21

14

200


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Car in Safe ConditionDon’t Drink and Drive

6

00/08/10 11:52:27 31S5P600_009

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED


Your Car’s Safety Features

7

((44))

((55))

((66))

((22))

((88))

((99))

((88))

((77))

((1100))

((11)) ((33))

((22))

((77))

((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonnee((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss ((OOppttiioonnaall))((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss

00/08/10 11:52:35 31S5P600_010

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.



Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

Why Wear Seat Belts

8

00/08/10 11:52:44 31S5P600_011

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thecar’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

What you should do:


Driver and Passenger Safety 9

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

00/08/10 11:52:53 31S5P600_012

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplement

the seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

Your car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

Only on models equipped with sideairbags.

Airbags

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:


Driver and Passenger Safety10

00/08/10 11:53:04 31S5P600_013

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Your car’s seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

Seats & Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Door LocksWhat you should do:



11

00/08/10 11:53:13 31S5P600_014

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.Head restraints are properly

adjusted (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

Both doors are closed and locked(see page ).

16

21

13

14

15

171

13

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist



00/08/10 11:53:25 31S5P600_015

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

37

83

CONTINUED

Introduction Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors1. 2.

Protecting Adults


00/08/10 11:53:36 31S5P600_016

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel while stillmaintaining full control of the car.Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

90

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults


Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

00/08/10 11:53:46 31S5P600_017

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

90

93

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Protecting Adults


Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

00/08/10 15:22:43 31S5P600_018

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. This

spreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

Protecting Adults


Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

00/08/10 11:54:04 31S5P600_019

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

43

75

Adjust the Steering Wheel6.

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

Protecting Adults


00/08/10 11:54:14 31S5P600_020

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car’s airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

7.

Protecting Adults


Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

00/08/10 11:54:21 31S5P600_021

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a vehicle.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults


Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

19

00/08/10 11:54:32 31S5P600_022

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbags inflate.

Protecting Adults


Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

On models with side airbags, donot attach hard objects on or neara front door.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

20

00/08/10 11:54:38 31S5P600_023

(See page.)

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section.

(See page.)

26

37

properly

CONTINUED


Protecting Children

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt.

21

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

00/08/10 11:54:49 31S5P600_024

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.


Protecting Children

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

22

00/08/10 11:55:00 31S5P600_025

CONTINUED

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

37


Protecting Children

U.S. ModelsSmall Children

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger Children

23

00/08/10 11:55:12 31S5P600_026

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Your car has three seating positionsin the back seat where children canbe properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your car:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

37

13

18

16


Protecting Children

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Canadian Models

24

00/08/10 11:55:28 31S5P600_027

Children who play in cars canaccidentally get trapped inside thetrunk. Teach your children not toplay in or around cars. Know howto operate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (See page ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

89

Protecting Children


Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your car is not in use.

Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

Keep car keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Additional Safety Precautions

25

00/08/10 15:22:49 31S5P600_028

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.30

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants:2.

1.

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:55:43 31S5P600_029

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

Your car has lower anchoragesinstalled for use with Child RestraintAnchorage System-compatible childseats. For more information, seepage .

34

42

CONTINUED

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Small Children:

3.

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:55:52 31S5P600_030

This page briefly summarizesHonda’s recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your car.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page ).

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facing childseat (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure a front-facing child seat (see page ).

35

35

31

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Back Seats

Small children:

Infants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


00/08/10 15:23:02 31S5P600_031

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to the carwith the lap part of a lap/shoulderbelt. Some child seats can besecured to the vehicle’s loweranchorages instead. A child whoseseat is not properly secured to thecar can be endangered in a crash.See pages , and forinstructions on how to properlysecure child seats in this car.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

31 4235

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe car.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:56:15 31S5P600_032

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant reaches the seatmaker’s weight or height limit and isable to sit up without support.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

00/08/10 11:56:26 31S5P600_033

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s loweranchorages, follow the instructionson page .

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

1.42

13

14

CONTINUED

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:56:36 31S5P600_034

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

4. 5.2.

3.

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:56:44 31S5P600_035

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:56:50 31S5P600_036

A child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker’s weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

In this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:56:59 31S5P600_037

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s loweranchorages, follow the instructionson page .

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

1.42

CONTINUED

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

00/08/10 11:57:09 31S5P600_038

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

4. 5.2.

3.

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:57:17 31S5P600_039

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

Protecting Larger Children

Protecting Children


Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possibleand wears the seat belt properly.

00/08/10 11:57:25 31S5P600_040

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

However, if the belt touches orcrosses the child’s neck, the childneeds to use a booster seat.

This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt. Follow theinstructions on page . Then checkhow the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown, the child is large enough towear the seat belt.

16

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:57:34 31S5P600_041

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a style thatallows the child to use the lap/shoulder belt directly, without ashield, as shown.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

CONTINUED

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:57:46 31S5P600_042

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

16 38

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Children


00/08/10 11:57:57 31S5P600_043

To use the anchorage point, pivot itscover up.

Your car has three tether anchoragepoints under the rear window forsecuring a tether-style child seat tothe car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions.

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children


AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEE PPOOIINNTT CCOOVVEERR

00/08/10 11:58:05 31S5P600_044

The exact location of each anchor ismarked with a small circle above thelower anchor point.

To install a child seat designed toattach to the lower anchorages:

Your car is equipped with loweranchorages at the outer rear seats.These anchorages are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom and are only to be used witha child seat designed to attach to thelower anchorages.

Move the seat belt buckle orcenter seat belt away from theanchorages.

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchorages.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchorage.

Put the child seat in the rear leftor right vehicle seat and attach thechild seat to the lower anchoragesaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children

Using the Lower Anchorages


LLOOWWEERR AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEESS RRiiggiidd ttyyppee

00/08/10 11:58:15 31S5P600_045

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the childseat maker’s instructions.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

4. 5.

6.

Protecting Children


FFlleexxiibbllee ttyyppee

00/08/10 11:58:22 31S5P600_046

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

31 35

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


00/08/10 11:58:33 31S5P600_047

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly. For added protection, the front seat

belts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

If your airbags inflate, the tensionersimmediately tighten the front seatbelts to help hold the occupants inplace. The belts will remain tightuntil you unbuckle them in thenormal way.

16

CONTINUED

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners



00/08/10 11:58:42 31S5P600_048

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).51

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models



Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

00/08/10 11:58:50 31S5P600_049

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,you should have your dealer inspectthe belt, and replace it if necessary.A belt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .259



00/08/10 11:58:56 31S5P600_050

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour car’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

4551

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags


00/08/10 11:59:07 31S5P600_051

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

CONTINUED



00/08/10 11:59:16 31S5P600_052

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

Your car is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

U.S. Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

Canadian Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

Only on models equipped with sideairbags.



How Your Side Airbags Work

50

00/08/10 15:23:14 31S5P600_053

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.When you turn the ignition ON (II),

this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

The purpose of the SRSindicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with yourfront airbags. On cars with sideairbags, this light will also alert youto a potential problem with yourautomatic seat belt tensioners (page

); or your side airbags orpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (page ).

45

50

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks



Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

00/08/10 11:59:35 31S5P600_054

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),the indicator should light briefly andgo out (see page ). If it doesn’tlight, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag indicator lightcomes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

61

Only on models equipped with sideairbags

How The Side Airbag IndicatorLight Works



00/08/10 11:59:44 31S5P600_055

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

Your front and side airbag systems(if equipped) are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have your carserviced if:

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the seat belttensioners, control unit and otherrelated parts. Do not try to removeor replace any airbag by yourself.This must be done by a Hondadealer or a knowledgeable bodyshop.

Take your car to anauthorized Honda dealer as soonas possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

170

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

Your airbags ever inflate.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.



00/08/10 11:59:54 31S5P600_056

Push the button.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Your car’s exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

00/08/10 12:00:03 31S5P600_057

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels


RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISORDASHBOARD

00/08/10 12:00:21 31S5P600_058

On models without side airbags

On models with side airbags

Safety Labels


HOOD

00/08/10 12:00:29 31S5P600_059

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 58...............................Indicator Lights . 59

.............................................Gauges . 66...............................Speedometer . 66

.................................Tachometer . 66

.....................................Odometer . 66...................................Trip Meter . 67..................................Fuel Gauge . 67

...................Temperature Gauge . 68Controls Near the Steering

.......................................Wheel . 69...................................Headlights . 70

............Daytime Running Lights . 71....Instrument Panel Brightness . 71

................................Turn Signals . 72.....................Windshield Wipers . 72

..................Windshield Washers . 73..........................Hazard Warning . 74

.............Rear Window Defogger . 74......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 75

...............Steering Wheel Controls . 76.............................Cruise Control . 76

...............................Keys and Locks . 79..............................................Keys . 79

....................Immobilizer System . 80............................Ignition Switch . 82

..................................Door Locks . 83......................Power Door Locks . 84

...................Remote Transmitter . 85...........................................Trunk . 88

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 89

............................Seat Adjustments . 90.............Front Seat Adjustments . 90

Driver’s Seat Height..............................Adjustment . 91

................Driver’s Seat Armrest . 91........................Rear Seat Access . 91

..........................Head Restraints . 93...........................Folding Rear Seat . 94

..............................Power Windows . 96.........................................Moonroof . 98

.............................................Mirrors . 99....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 99

...............................Parking Brake . 100......................................Glove Box . 101

...........................Beverage Holder . 102.................Console Compartment . 102

........................................Coin Box . 103...............................Center Pocket . 103

.............Accessory Power Socket . 103......................................Coat Hook . 104

.................................Cargo Hooks . 104..................................Cargo Net . 104

...............................Interior Lights . 105..............................Ceiling Light . 105

...................................Spotlights . 106........................Courtesy Lights . 106

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 57

00/08/10 12:00:35 31S5P600_060

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls58

((PP.. 8888))

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

((PP.. 111199,, 113311,, 114433))

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL((PP.. 7777))

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL((PP.. 7766))

((PP.. 8844))

MMIIRRRROORRCCOONNTTRROOLLSS

PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSSWWIITTCCHH

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF((PP.. 9988))

((PP.. 9966))

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE

((PP.. 116633))

((PP.. 111166,, 112288,, 114400))

((PP.. 110088))((PP.. 9999))

((PP.. 116644))

00/08/10 15:23:21 31S5P600_061

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊ CONTINUED

1

2The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.Shift Lever Position Indicator for the HX is shown on page 185 .

Indicator Lights


U.S.: HX, LX, EX, Canada: LX, Si

59

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR TTRRUUNNKK--OOPPEENN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6622))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6622))

((PP.. 6644))

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDDBBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDDIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 228800))

AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 6644))

((PP.. 227799))

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREEIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP.. 227788))

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR PPOOSSIITTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((LLXX,,EEXX))

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP.. 6633))

SSEEAATT BBEELLTT RREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT((PP.. 6611))

11

22

00/08/10 15:23:30 31S5P600_062

＊

＊＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights


DX

60

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREEIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR TTRRUUNNKK--OOPPEENN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 6611)) ((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6622))((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6644))

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDDBBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 227788))

((PP.. 227799))

((PP.. 228800))

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP.. 6644))

((PP.. 6611))SSEEAATT BBEELLTT RREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT

00/08/10 15:23:38 31S5P600_063

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags or automatic seatbelt tensioners. On models equippedwith side airbags, this light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour side airbags or passenger’s sideairbag automatic cutoff system. Forcomplete information, see page .51

52

CONTINUED


Indicator Lights


Seat Belt Reminder Light

Side Airbag IndicatorSupplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

61

00/08/10 12:01:11 31S5P600_064

This light has two functions:This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thecar to your dealer to have it checked.With the light on, your car still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, seepage .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

1.

2.

279

278

282

192

Only on models equipped with ABS (seepage )190

Parking Brakeand BrakeSystemIndicator

Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS)Indicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Indicator Lights


U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

00/08/10 12:01:22 31S5P600_065

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

See page .

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

This light comes on if the trunk lid isnot closed tightly.

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

70

71

76

280

248

219

Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Canadian models only

CONTINUED

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Trunk-open Indicator

Indicator Lights


00/08/10 15:23:57 31S5P600_066

－

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance.Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages .

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

80

198 204

Indicator Lights

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Maintenance RequiredIndicator


00/08/10 12:01:49 31S5P600_067

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the button until the indicatorresets (approximately tenseconds).

1.

2.

3.

Indicator Lights


00/08/10 12:01:56 31S5P600_068

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

U.S. ModelsCanadian Models

On HX, LX and EX models in U.S.,and LX and Si models in Canada

Speedometer

Tachometer

Odometer

U.S.: HX, LX, EX, Canada: LX, Si

Gauges


FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE GGAAUUGGEE

SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNOODDOOMMEETTEERR//TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

00/08/10 12:02:07 31S5P600_069

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer bypressing the Select/Reset buttonrepeatedly. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

Gauges


Trip Meter

Fuel Gauge

DX

67

FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEETTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE GGAAUUGGEE

OODDOOMMEETTEERR//TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

00/08/10 15:26:29 31S5P600_070

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper zone. If it reaches the red(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side ofthe road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

275

Gauges


Temperature Gauge

68

00/08/10 12:02:22 31S5P600_071

＊

＊＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The hazard warning lights switch ison the dashboard between thecenter air vents.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof, mirrors andcruise control.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

To use the horn, press the centerpad of the steering wheel.

:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel


HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGGLLIIGGHHTTSS

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDDWWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLLSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLLMMAASSTTEERRSSWWIITTCCHH

HHOORRNN

00/08/10 12:02:30 31S5P600_072

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

To change from low beams to highbeams, push the turn signal leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will light(see page ). To return to lowbeams, pull the turn signal leverback.

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder tone when you open thedriver’s door.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off. The high beams willstay on for as long as you hold thelever back, no matter what positionthe headlight switch is in.

63

Headlights



00/08/10 12:02:39 31S5P600_073

Canadian models onlyWith the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Turn the knob on the left side of theinstrument panel to adjust thebrightness of the instrument panellights.

Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights



00/08/10 12:02:46 31S5P600_074

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

This lever controls the windshieldwipers and washers. It has fivepositions;

MIST: mistOFF: offINT: intermittentLO: low speedHI: high speed

To select a position, push the leverup or down.

Turn Signals Windshield Wipers



00/08/10 12:02:55 31S5P600_075

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. In low speed andhigh speed, the wipers run continu-ously.

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever up from theOFF position. The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.This gives you a quick way to clearthe windshield.

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever.

The wipers run at low speed whileyou’re pulling the lever, thencomplete one more sweep of thewindshield after you release it.

Windshield Washers



00/08/10 12:03:03 31S5P600_076

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your car is disabled.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light in thebutton lights to show the defogger ison. If you do not turn it off, thedefogger will shut itself off afterabout 15 minutes. It also shuts offwhen you turn off the ignition. Youhave to turn it on again when yourestart the car.



Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning

74

00/08/10 12:03:12 31S5P600_077

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

4.

3.

2.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

17



Steering Wheel Adjustment

75

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

00/08/10 12:03:23 31S5P600_078

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

1.

2.

On HX, LX and EX models in the U.S.,and LX and Si models in Canada


Steering Wheel Controls

Cruise Control Using the Cruise Control

76

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

00/08/10 12:03:31 31S5P600_079

CONTINUED

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The car will acceler-ate. When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your car will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

3.



Changing the Set Speed

77

RREESSUUMMEE//aacccceell

SSEETT//ddeecceell

00/08/10 12:03:43 31S5P600_080

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The car will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/decel button.The car will then maintain thedesired speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.



Cancelling the Cruise Control

78

CCAANNCCEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:03:54 31S5P600_081

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk, trunk release handleand rear seat trunk access lockedwhen you leave your car and thevalet key at a parking facility. (SeeTrunk, page .)

You should have received a keynumber plate with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a lost key replaced.Keep the plate stored in a safe place.When replacing keys, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.Your car comes with two master

keys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Doors• Trunk• Trunk release handle• Rear seat trunk access

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thecar will begin to slow down. You canuse the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressthe RESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light comes on,and the car will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

89

CONTINUED


Steering Wheel Controls, Keys and Locks

Keys

Using theCruise Control

79

KKEEYYNNUUMMBBEERRPPLLAATTEE

MMAASSTTEERRKKEEYYSS

VVAALLEETTKKEEYY

00/08/10 12:04:06 31S5P600_082

The Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Some models also come with tworemote transmitters; see page foran explanation of their operation.

85

Keys and Locks


Immobilizer SystemRemote Transmitter

80

00/08/10 12:04:16 31S5P600_083

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

This indicator will also blink severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourcar’s key and the ignition switchwhile trying to start the engine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Keys and Locks


00/08/10 12:04:25 31S5P600_084

－ You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your car hasan automatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park. The anti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)


Keys and Locks

LOCK (0)Ignition Switch

82

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

00/08/10 12:04:33 31S5P600_085

－

－

－In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, pull the outsidedoor handle and push the lock tabdown. Release the handle, then closethe door.

80

CONTINUED

Keys and Locks


ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

Door LocksSTART (III)

83

00/08/10 12:04:44 31S5P600_086

The front doors can be locked andunlocked from the outside with thekey.

To lock the driver’s door whengetting out of the car, pull the insidedoor handle and push down themaster door lock switch or the locktab.

All doors lock when you push downthe lock tab on the driver’s door, orlock the driver’s door from theoutside with the key. Only the driver’sdoor unlocks when you use the keyor lock tab. To unlock the passen-gers’ doors, use the master door lockswitch or the lock tab on each door.

The master door lock switch allowscontrol of both door locks from thedriver’s door. Push the switch downto lock both doors, and up to unlockthem.

Standard on HX, LX and EX models inthe U.S., and LX and Si models inCanada

Keys and Locks


Power Door Locks

84

MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH

00/08/10 12:04:52 31S5P600_087

CONTINUED

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, the hornwill sound once to verify that thedoors are locked.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The remaining doors unlock whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash twice.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany of the doors, the light will go outin about 30 seconds and the doorswill automatically relock. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

You cannot lock or unlock the doorswith the remote transmitter if anydoor is not fully closed or the key isin the ignition switch.

You can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorslock. The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash once.

Standard on EX model in the U.S., and Simodel in CanadaOptional on HX and LX models in theU.S., and on LX in Canada model

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


LLEEDD

UUNNLLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

PPAANNIICCBBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:05:02 31S5P600_088

＋

To replace the battery, remove theround cover on the back of the trans-mitter by turning it counterclockwisewith a coin.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will get dim. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car’s horn and exteriorlights to attract attention. Whenactivated, the horn will sound, andthe exterior lights will flash, forabout 30 seconds. To activate panicmode, press and hold the PANICbutton for about one second.

To cancel PANIC mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch toACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if theignition switch is in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.


Keys and Locks

Replacing the BatteryPanic Mode

86

OOppeenn

CClloossee

RROOUUNNDDCCOOVVEERR

CCUUSSHHIIOONNRRIINNGG

BBAATTTTEERRYY

00/08/10 12:05:14 31S5P600_089

▽◎

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car’s system byyour Honda dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.

Reinstall the cushion ring. Align themark on the cover with themark on the transmitter,

then set the cover in place and turn itclockwise.

Keys and Locks


Transmitter Care

87

00/08/10 12:05:24 31S5P600_090

You can open the trunk in two ways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.

Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse, lock the trunk release handlewith the master key and give theother person the valet key.

54

171

Keys and Locks


Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

88

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

00/08/10 12:05:35 31S5P600_091

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

As a safety feature, your car has arelease lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .25

U.S. models only

Keys and Locks


Emergency Trunk Opener

89

00/08/10 12:05:44 31S5P600_092

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch inthe new position.

Front Seat Adjustments

Seat Adjustments


00/08/10 12:05:52 31S5P600_093

To adjust the height of the driver’sseat, turn the dial on the outside ofthe seat bottom.

To use the driver’s seat armrest,pivot it down.

To get into the back seat on thedriver’s side, pull up on the seat-backadjustment lever.

To tilt the passenger’s seat-back outof the way, push down on the releaselever at the base of the seat-back.

CONTINUED

On EX model in the U.S., and Si modelin Canada


On HX, EX and LX models in the U.S.,and Si model in Canada

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Driver’s Seat Armrest Rear Seat Access

Seat Adjustments


00/08/10 12:06:04 31S5P600_094

Push the passenger’s seat-back whilepushing down on the release lever totilt the seat-back out of the way. Theentire seat will slide forward at thesame time. Adjust the seat-back angle to the

desired position with the adjustmentlever on the outside of the seatbottom.

To get into the back seat on thepassenger’s side, push back on therelease lever at the base of the seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forwardand the entire seat will move forwardto allow easier entry to the back seat.After you return the seat-back to theupright position, push the whole seatbackwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

On HX model in the U.S., and allCanadian models

On EX and LX models in the U.S.

Seat Adjustments


Front Passenger’s Seat with PositionMemory

92

00/08/10 12:06:10 31S5P600_095

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

The front head restraints adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down.

The front head restraints helpprotect you and your passenger fromwhiplash and other injuries. They aremost effective when you adjust themso the back of the occupant’s headrests against the center of therestraint. A taller person shouldadjust the restraint as high aspossible.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15

Seat Adjustments


Head Restraints

93

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:06:18 31S5P600_096

The back of the rear seat folds downto give you direct access to the trunk.Each side folds down separately.With only half the seat folded, youcan still carry a passenger in theback seat. The seat-back can bereleased from inside the car or insidethe trunk.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To fold down either side of the seat-back from inside the car, insert themaster key in the lock on the rearshelf. To fold down the driver’s side,turn the key clockwise, pull down thetop of the seat-back, then release thekey. To fold down the passenger’sside, turn the key counterclockwiseand perform the same procedure.

Folding Rear Seat


00/08/10 12:06:25 31S5P600_097

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release under thetrunk panel. Push the seat-backdown, then let go of the release.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .54

171Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Folding Rear Seat


RREELLEEAASSEE

00/08/10 12:06:34 31S5P600_098

Your car’s windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower any window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passengers’ win-dows, push down on the appropriateswitch and hold it down until thewindow reaches the desired position.To close the window, pull back onthe window switch. Release theswitch when the window gets to theposition you want.

On LX and EX models in the U.S., andLX and Si models in Canada

On LX and EX models in the U.S., andLX and Si models in Canada

Power Windows


Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

00/08/10 12:06:41 31S5P600_099

－

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down and release it.The window automatically goes allthe way down. To stop the windowfrom going all the way down, pullback on the window switch briefly.

To open the driver’s window onlypartially, push the window switchdown lightly and hold it. The windowwill stop as soon as you release theswitch.

The AUTO function only works tolower the driver’s window. To raisethe window, you must pull back onthe window switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passengers’ windows. With thisswitch off, the passengers’ windowscannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver’s window. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe car so they do not injure them-selves by operating the windowsunintentionally.

AUTO

Power Windows


00/08/10 12:06:48 31S5P600_100

Use the switches on the dashboardunder the left vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition must be ON(II).

To lift the rear of the moonroof forventilation, push the button.To slide the moonroof back, pushthe switch. Hold it until themoonroof reaches the desiredposition, then release the switch.To close the moonroof, press andhold the switch.



Moonroof

98

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

00/08/10 12:06:55 31S5P600_101

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the left side ofthe dashboard:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

On HX, LX and EX models in the U.S.,and LX and Si models in Canada

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH

TTAABB

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHH

00/08/10 12:07:07 31S5P600_102

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

62

On Canadian Si model

Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake


PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE LLEEVVEERR

Driving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

00/08/10 12:07:14 31S5P600_103

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.

Glove Box


An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

00/08/10 12:07:20 31S5P600_104

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Squeeze the handle and slide theconsole compartment lid backwardto access the compartment.

A beverage holder for rear seatpassengers is in the back of theconsole. To use it, pivot the lid down.

On EX model in U.S. On EX model in the U.S., and LX and Simodels in Canada

Beverage Holder Console Compartment

Beverage Holder, Console Compartment


00/08/10 12:07:29 31S5P600_105

The coin box is located under the airvent. To open the coin box, pull thebottom edge. Close it with a firmpush.

To use the accessory power socket,pull up the cover. The ignition switchmust be in ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II).

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.

The center pocket is located underthe audio system. To open the lid,pull it down. Close it with a firm push.

On EX model in the U.S., and LX and Simodels in Canada

Coin Box Center Pocket Accessory Power Socket

Coin Box, Center Pocket, Accessory Power Socket


00/08/10 12:07:39 31S5P600_106

To use a coat hook, push on the lid.Close it with a firm push.

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

The hooks on the floor of the cargoarea enable you to tie down itemsstored in the back. Make sure allstored items are secured beforedriving.

You can use the cargo net to secureitems in the cargo area. To install thecargo net, hook the loops on the fourcorners of the net to the tabs at bothsides of the tailgate sill.

On EX models in the U.S.

Coat Hook Cargo Hooks Cargo Net

Coat Hook, Cargo Hooks


00/08/10 12:07:49 31S5P600_107

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door. In the ONposition, the ceiling light stays oncontinuously.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight stays on, then fades out inabout 10 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with thekey or the remote transmitter (seepage ).

Your car also has a front ceiling lightbetween the sun visors.

85


Ceiling Light

Interior Lights


00/08/10 12:07:57 31S5P600_108

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canuse the spotlights at all times.

Your car also has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver’s door.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.


On LX model On EX model in the U.S.

Interior Lights

Spotlights Courtesy Lights


LLXX

00/08/10 12:08:07 31S5P600_109

＊

＊

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your Honda provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them. (If you selected anoptional audio system, refer to theoperating instructions that camewith it.)

.....................Heating and Cooling . 108.........What Each Control Does . 108

............How to Use the System . 110..........To Turn Everything Off . 115

......................Audio System (DX) . 116.................Operating the Radio . 116.................Adjusting the Sound . 120

............Audio System Lighting . 121..............................Digital Clock . 121

Operating the Optional Cassette.....................................Player . 122

............Tape Search Functions . 123Operating the Optional

.............CD Player/Changer . 125.......Audio System (U.S. HX, LX) . 128

.................Operating the Radio . 128

.................Adjusting the Sound . 132............Audio System Lighting . 133

..............................Digital Clock . 133Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 134............Tape Search Functions . 135

Operating the Optional.............CD Player/Changer . 137

Audio System (U.S. EX and...................Canadian LX, Si) . 140.................Operating the Radio . 140.................Adjusting the Sound . 144

............Audio System Lighting . 145..............................Digital Clock . 145

....................Radio Frequencies . 146........................Radio Reception . 147

.........Operating the CD Player . 149.....Operating the CD Changer . 151

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 152....CD Player Error Indications . 153

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 154

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 155

............Tape Search Functions . 156Caring for the Cassette

.....................................Player . 158.......................Theft Protection . 159

Air conditioning is standard on LXand EX models in the U.S., and LXmodel in Canada. It is optional onother models.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 107

00/08/10 12:08:13 31S5P600_110

Proper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for bestvisibility.

If your car does not have airconditioning, it can be installed atany time. Your dealer can install aGenuine Honda air conditioningsystem that meets Honda’s highquality standards and is designed toexactly fit your car. Please contactyour dealer for more information.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan’s speed, which increases airflow.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator in this button is lit, airfrom the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorin the button lights when the A/C ison.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).74

Standard for LX and EX models in theU.S., and DX and LX models in CanadaOptional for other models


Heating and Cooling

Recirculation Button

What Each Control Does

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

108

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERRBBUUTTTTOONN

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREECCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

00/08/10 12:08:27 31S5P600_111

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Use the MODE control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardvents in all modes.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

Heating and Cooling


Mode Control Dial

109

00/08/10 12:08:38 31S5P600_112

This section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.

You can adjust the direction of theair coming from the dashboard ventsby moving the tab in the center ofeach vent up-and-down and side-to-side.

The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials underneath them.

Heating and Cooling


Vent Controls How to Use the System

110

SSIIDDEE VVEENNTTCCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTT

OOppeennCClloossee

00/08/10 12:08:49 31S5P600_113

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling


Ventilation

111







00/08/10 12:08:58 31S5P600_114

When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-gotraffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The light in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Start the engine.Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. Make sure the tempera-ture control dial is turned all theway to the left.Set the fan to maximum speed.Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

1.2.

3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

68


Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

112







00/08/10 12:09:08 31S5P600_115

To warm the interior:Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Start the engine.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial. Switch the fan on.

Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

Switch the fan on.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling


To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioning

To Defog and Defrost

113

00/08/10 12:09:19 31S5P600_116

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Switch the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the car has been sitting out incold weather:

1.2.

3.


Heating and Cooling

114




AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN


RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:09:26 31S5P600_117

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the side vents with the dialbeside each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

You should shut the systemcompletely off only for the first fewminutes of driving in cold weather,until the engine coolant warms upenough to operate the heater. Keepthe fan on at all other times so staleair does not build up in the interior.

To shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

Heating and Cooling


To Turn Everything Off

115

00/08/10 12:09:33 31S5P600_118

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob. The band and frequency that the

radio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

For DX model

Audio System


AM/FM Stereo Audio System

Operating the Radio

116

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB SSEEEEKK BBAARR TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

00/08/10 12:09:41 31S5P600_119

－

－－

CONTINUED

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob clockwise to tune to ahigher frequency, orcounterclockwise to tune to a lowerfrequency.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the Preset buttons.

To change the frequency rapidly,press and hold the top or bottom ofthe SEEK bar. Release the bar whenthe display reaches the desiredfrequency. Depending on which partof the bar you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressand release the top or bottom of theSEEK bar. Depending on which partof the bar you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Audio System


TUNE

SEEK SCAN

117

00/08/10 12:09:49 31S5P600_120

－ You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System


Preset

118




AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN




00/08/10 12:10:00 31S5P600_121

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will appear inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

With Auto Select on, you canmanually store any frequencies inthe preset buttons. If you do not likethe stations found by Auto Select,you can use the TUNE, SEEK andSCAN functions to find otherstations.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

119


AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN



AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

00/08/10 12:10:09 31S5P600_122

－

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob. The level number onthe display shows you the range.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob. The levelnumber on the display shows you therange.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

For information, See page .146


Audio System

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Radio Frequencies and Reception

120

LLEEVVEELL NNUUMMBBEERR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

00/08/10 12:10:20 31S5P600_123

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

The audio system also displays thetime. To set the time, the ignitionswitch must be in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II), and you must wait aboutfive seconds after performing anyother operations with the system.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, the clock is setback to the previous hour bypressing and holding the CLOCKbutton, then pressing the RESET(Preset 6) button. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the clockis set forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

Adjust the minutes by pressing andholding the CLOCK button, thenpressing the M (Preset 5) button.

Adjust the hours by pressing andholding the CLOCK button, thenpressing the H (Preset 4) button.

71

Audio System


Audio System Lighting

Digital Clock

121

CCLLOOCCKK BBUUTTTTOONN

RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

MM BBUUTTTTOONN

HH BBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:10:32 31S5P600_124

＊

＊

▲

The cassette system features DolbyB noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO )tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or optional CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM/FM or CD/TAPEbutton. To change back to thecassette player, press the CD/TAPEbutton.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noisereduction, turn it off by pressing theNR button.

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Audio System


Operating the Optional CassettePlayer

122

00/08/10 12:10:41 31S5P600_125

－

－

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

The Skip Function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To find the beginning ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, push the lower part of theSKIP bar. You will see REW flashingin the display as the tape rewinds. Tofind the beginning of the next song,

push the upper part of the SKIP bar.You will see FF flashing in thedisplay as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds thebeginning of a song or passage, itgoes back to PLAY mode.

CONTINUED

Audio System


Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

SKIP

123


CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPP BBAARR NNRR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:10:50 31S5P600_126

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

158

Audio System


Caring for Cassettes

REPEAT

124

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN


FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN


SSKKIIPP BBAARR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD//TTAAPPEE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

00/08/10 12:10:58 31S5P600_127

－－

＋＋

A trunk-mounted Compact Discchanger is available through yourdealer. It holds up to six discs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate the CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

Your dealer also has an accessory in-dash single CD player available thatis operated by the radio controls. Tooperate this unit, use the instructions(except for those relating to multiplediscs) in this section.

To operate the CD changer or player,the ignition must be in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) and the audio systemmust be on.

CONTINUED

Operating the Optional CDPlayer/Changer

Audio System


RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

DDIISSCC BBUUTTTTOONN

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

RRAANNDDOOMM BBUUTTTTOONNCCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

DDIISSCC BBUUTTTTOONNSSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR

00/08/10 12:11:08 31S5P600_128

＋－

＋－

Press the CD/TAPE button. You willsee ‘‘CDC’’ in the display. Thesystem will start to play the firsttrack of the first disc. When that discends, the next disc in the magazineis loaded and played. After the lastdisc finishes, the system returns todisc 1.

To select a different disc, press theDISC (Preset 6) or DISC(Preset 5) button. The next disc inthe changer is loaded and playedwhen you press the DISC button.DISC loads and plays the previousdisc. If you select an empty slot inthe magazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

Press the EJECT button to removethe disc from the player.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

Using the instructions that camewith the changer, load the desiredCDs in the magazine, and load themagazine in the changer. Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

Insert the disc into the CD slot. Pushthe disc in halfway, the drive will pullit in the rest of the way. Push theCD/TAPE button and the disc willstart to play.

You will see the track number beingplayed in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

Audio System


CD Changer

CD Player

126

00/08/10 12:11:19 31S5P600_129

－

－

When you activate theRepeat feature by pressing the RPTbutton, the system continuouslyreplays the current track. You willsee RPT in the display as a reminder.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks on aCD in random order, rather than inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly onthe current disc. When all tracks onthat disc have been played, the nextdisc is loaded and played randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

If you push and hold the SEEK/SKIP bar, the system will continue tomove across tracks. Release the barwhen you think it has reached thedesired place on the disc.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar toselect tracks within a disc. If youpress and release the SEEK/SKIPbar, the system will move to thebeginning of a track. Press the

side to move to the beginningof the next track, and the sideto move to the beginning of thecurrent track.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or insert acassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe CD/TAPE button. When youreturn to CD mode, play will contin-ue at the same point that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

For information, See page .


152

153

154

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Protecting Compact Discs

CD Player Error Indications

CD Changer Error Indications

CD Player and Changer

127

00/08/10 12:11:32 31S5P600_130

＊

＊



The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

2



For HX and LX models in the U.S.

Audio System


AM/FM/Cassette Stereo AudioSystem

Operating the Radio

128



AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEEEEKK BBAARR SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOOSSEELLEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBPPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

00/08/10 12:11:42 31S5P600_131

－

－－

CONTINUED






Audio System


TUNE

SEEK SCAN

129

00/08/10 12:11:51 31S5P600_132

－ You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.





Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.



1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System


Preset

130



AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEEEEKK BBAARR SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN



00/08/10 12:12:02 31S5P600_133


To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will appear inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.


With Auto Select on, you canmanually store any frequencies inthe preset buttons. If you do not likethe stations found by Auto Select,you can use the TUNE, SEEK andSCAN functions to find otherstations.


Audio System


AUTO SELECT

131




SSEEEEKK BBAARR

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB




00/08/10 12:12:11 31S5P600_134

－

－






For information, See page .146


Audio System

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Radio Frequencies and Reception

132

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB


00/08/10 12:12:22 31S5P600_135


The audio system usually shows thetime when the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Itshows the operation mode of theradio, cassette player, or optional CDchanger when you operate them,then goes back to the time displayafter five seconds. Adjust the hours by pressing and

holding the CLOCK button, thenpressing the H (Preset 4) button.


You can set the time only when theclock is displayed.

If an error occurs while operatingthe optional CD player or changer,the display will keep showing theerror code and will not switch to thetime display until the error iscorrected (see pages and ).

71

154153

CONTINUED

Audio System



Digital Clock

133


RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

MM BBUUTTTTOONN

HH BBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:12:34 31S5P600_136

▲Turn the audio system ON. Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.



1:06 would RESET to 1:001:52 would RESET to 2:00

For example:

Operating the Cassette Player

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features134

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN


RREEPPEEAATTBBUUTTTTOONN

CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

NNRRIINNDDIICCAATTOORR




SSKKIIPP BBAARR

NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:12:44 31S5P600_137

－

－

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. If thetape was not recorded with Dolby Bnoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

The Skip Function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To find the beginning ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, push the lower part of theSKIP bar. You will see REW flashingin the display as the tape rewinds. Tofind the beginning of the next song,push the upper part of the SKIP bar.You will see FF flashing in thedisplay as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds thebeginning of a song or passage, itgoes back to PLAY mode.If you turn the system off while a

tape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or optional CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM/FM or CD/TAPEbutton. To change back to thecassette player, press the CD/TAPEbutton.



CONTINUED

Audio System


SKIP

FF/REW


135

00/08/10 12:12:53 31S5P600_138

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

158

Audio System


REPEAT

Caring for Cassettes

136

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONNRREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN


RREEPPEEAATTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR


CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN SSKKIIPP BBAARR



00/08/10 12:13:02 31S5P600_139

－－

＋＋

CONTINUED

Your dealer also has an accessory in-dash single CD player available thatis operated by the radio controls. Tooperate this unit, use the instructions(except for those relating to multiplediscs) in this section.

A trunk-mounted Compact Discchanger is available for your dealer.It holds up to six discs, providingseveral hours of continuousentertainment. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio and cassette player.

To operate the CD changer or player,the ignition must be in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) and the audio systemmust be on.

Audio System


Operating the Optional CDPlayer/Changer

137

RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORRAAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN



RRAANNDDOOMMBBUUTTTTOONN



SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR



00/08/10 12:13:11 31S5P600_140

＋－

＋－

Press the CD/TAPE button. You willsee ‘‘CDC’’ in the display. Thesystem will start to play the firsttrack of the first disc. When that discends, the next disc in the magazineis loaded and played. After the lastdisc finishes, the system returns todisc 1.


Press the EJECT button to removethe disc from the player.


Using the instructions that camewith the changer, load the desiredCDs in the magazine, and load themagazine in the changer. Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

Insert the disc into the CD slot. Pushthe disc in halfway, the drive will pullit in the rest of the way. Push theCD/TAPE button and the disc willstart to play.

You will see the track number beingplayed in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.


Audio System


CD Changer

CD Player

138

00/08/10 12:13:22 31S5P600_141

－

－

When you activate theRepeat feature by pressing the RPTbutton, the system continuouslyreplays the current track. You willsee RPT in the display as a reminder.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks on aCD in random order, rather than inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly onthe current disc. When all tracks onthat disc have been played, the nextdisc is loaded and played randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

If you push and hold the SEEK/SKIP bar, the system will continue tomove across tracks. Release the barwhen you think it has reached thedesired place on the disc.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar toselect tracks within a disc. If youpress and release the SEEK/SKIPbar, the system will move to thebeginning of a track. Press the

side to move to the beginningof the next track, and the sideto move to the beginning of thecurrent track.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or insert acassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe CD/TAPE button. When youreturn to CD mode, play will contin-ue at the same point that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.



152

153

154

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY




CD Player and Changer

139

00/08/10 12:13:35 31S5P600_142

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.


The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

159

For EX model in the U.S., and LX and Simodels in Canada

Audio System


AM/FM/CD Audio System

Operating the Radio

140




SSEEEEKK BBAARR




SSCCAANNBBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:13:44 31S5P600_143

－

－－

CONTINUED






Audio System


TUNE

SEEK SCAN

141

00/08/10 12:13:52 31S5P600_144

－





Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.


You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.


1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System


Preset

142


TTUUNNEE BBAARR



SSEEEEKK BBAARRPPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS




00/08/10 12:14:03 31S5P600_145


To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.



If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

AUTO SELECT

Audio System



TTUUNNEE BBAARRSSEEEEKK BBAARRPPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS





00/08/10 12:14:12 31S5P600_146

－

－







Audio System

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

144


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

00/08/10 12:14:22 31S5P600_147


The display of your audio systemusually shows the time when theignition switch is in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II). It shows the operationmode of the radio, CD player, oroptional CD changer/cassette playerwhen you operate them, and goesback to the time display after fiveseconds.

You can set the time only when theclock is displayed.

Adjust the hours by pressing andholding the CLOCK button, thenpressing the H (Preset 4) button.


If an error occurs while operatingthe CD player or optional CDchanger, the display will show theerror code and will not switch to thetime display until the error iscorrected (see pages and ).

71

153 154

CONTINUED


Digital Clock

Audio System



MM BBUUTTTTOONN RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

HH BBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 15:26:41 31S5P600_148


Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

For example:

Audio System


Radio Frequencies

146

00/08/10 12:14:44 31S5P600_149

CONTINUED

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

Audio System


Radio Reception

147

00/08/10 12:14:52 31S5P600_150

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


00/08/10 12:14:59 31S5P600_151

CONTINUED

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.


Audio System


Operating the CD Player

149

CCDD SSLLOOTTAAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN


CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RRAANNDDOOMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR

RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

00/08/10 12:15:09 31S5P600_152

－

－

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.


Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

Audio System


RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT

150

00/08/10 12:15:20 31S5P600_153

＋－

＋－

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.


If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

A trunk-mounted Compact Discchanger is available for your vehicle.It holds up to six discs, providingseveral hours of continuousentertainment. You operate this CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the in-dash CD player.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

Audio System


Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

151

00/08/10 12:15:31 31S5P600_154

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, felt-tippens, and labels can cause the CD tonot play properly, or possibly jam inthe drive.


Audio System


00/08/10 12:15:40 31S5P600_155

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature.

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Audio System



153

00/08/10 15:26:49 31S5P600_156

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High temperature.

No CD magazine in theCD changer.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

Audio System



154

00/08/10 15:27:00 31S5P600_157

＊

＊

CONTINUED


Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

2



Audio System


Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)

155

NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN




NNRR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN


FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN


SSKKIIPP BBAARR

00/08/10 12:16:09 31S5P600_158

▲

－


Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noisereduction, turn it off by pressing theNR button.


Dolby remains off until you turn it onby pressing the button again.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe PLAY button.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD button. To changeback to the cassette player, push theCD button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton on the cassette player.


Audio System



FF/REW

156

00/08/10 12:16:19 31S5P600_159

－－ The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The Skip Function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To find the beginning ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, push the lower part of theSKIP bar. You will see REW flashingin the display as the tape rewinds. Tofind the beginning of the next song,push the upper part of the SKIP bar.You will see FF flashing in thedisplay as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds thebeginning of a song or passage, itgoes back to PLAY mode.

Audio System


REPEATSKIP

157

00/08/10 12:16:25 31S5P600_160

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.

The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ on the display, pressthe EJECT button and remove thecassette from the unit. Make surethe tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the car to your Hondadealer.

Audio System


Caring for the Cassette Player

158

00/08/10 12:16:36 31S5P600_161

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. If it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

Your car’s audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific five-digit code in thePreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

For EX model in the U.S., and LX and Simodels in Canada

Audio System


Theft Protection

159

00/08/10 12:16:44 31S5P600_162

160

00/08/10 12:16:47 31S5P600_163

Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 162.........................................Gasoline . 162

.........Service Station Procedures . 163................Filling the Fuel Tank . 163

....................Opening the Hood . 164...............................Oil Check . 166

.........Engine Coolant Check . 167...............................Fuel Economy . 168

.....................Vehicle Condition . 168...........................Driving Habits . 168

...Accessories and Modifications . 169.............................Carrying Cargo . 171

Before Driving

Before Driving 161

00/08/10 12:16:52 31S5P600_164

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

Help assure your car’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

162

00/08/10 12:17:04 31S5P600_165

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to helpkeep fuel vapors from going intothe atmosphere. If the fuel pumpkeeps clicking off even though thetank is not full, there may be aproblem with this system. Consultyour dealer.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Filling the Fuel Tank

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 163

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

00/08/10 12:17:15 31S5P600_166

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Standing in front of the car, putyour fingers under the front edgeof the hood to the right of center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1. 2.

5.

6.

280


Before Driving

Opening the Hood

164

HHOOOODDRREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

LLAATTCCHH

00/08/10 12:17:24 31S5P600_167

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe left side of the hood.

After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.

3.

226

CONTINUED


Before Driving 165

SSUUPPPPOORRTT RROODD

00/08/10 12:17:33 31S5P600_168

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

2. 3.

1.

Oil Check


Before Driving166

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

00/08/10 12:17:42 31S5P600_169

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

4.

209

213

207

AddingEngine Coolant

Adding Oil

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Engine Coolant Check


Before Driving 167

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

MMAAXX

MMIINN

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

00/08/10 12:17:51 31S5P600_170

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car’s underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

207

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Before Driving

Fuel Economy

168

00/08/10 12:18:03 31S5P600_171

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Genuine Hondaaccessories that allow you topersonalize your car. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your car, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on the page foradditional information.)

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

Before installing any accessory:

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car’s electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operationof your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

170

284

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving 169

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar’s handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

00/08/10 12:18:15 31S5P600_172

In addition, any modifications thatdecrease ground clearance increasethe chance of undercarriage partsstriking a curb, speed bump, or otherraised object, which could causeyour airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Do not remove any originalequipment or modify your car in anyway that would alter its design oroperation. This could make your carunsafe and illegal to drive.

For example, do not make anymodifications that would change theride height of your car, or installwheels and tires with a differentoverall diameter.

Such modifications can adverselyaffect handling, and interfere withthe operation of the car’s anti-lockbrakes and other systems.

Do not attach or place objects onthe airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.


Modifications

Additional Safety Precaution

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

170

00/08/10 12:18:26 31S5P600_173

＊＊

＊＊＊＊

＊＊

Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car’s handling, stability andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe front doors and seat-back, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseat can be folded down to allow youto carry more cargo or longer items.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 171

FFRROONNTT DDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETT

GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXX

TTRRUUNNKK

CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

SSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETT 11:: UU..SS..:: EEXX mmooddeellCCaannaaddaa:: LLXX aanndd SSii mmooddeellss

22:: UU..SS..:: HHXX,, LLXX aanndd EEXX mmooddeellssCCaannaaddaa:: LLXX aanndd SSii mmooddeellss

11

22

00/08/10 12:18:33 31S5P600_174

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

Add up the weight of all occupants.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

The maximum load for your car is850 lbs (395 kg).

Subtract the total from 850 lbs(395 kg).

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving172

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

00/08/10 12:18:45 31S5P600_175

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the car during a crash orsudden stop.

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer for further information.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .54

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 173

00/08/10 12:18:52 31S5P600_176

174

00/08/10 12:18:55 31S5P600_177

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includes impor-tant information on parking your car,and the braking system.

........................Preparing to Drive . 176.......................Starting the Engine . 177

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 177

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 178.....Recommended Shift Points . 179

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 179

..............Automatic Transmission . 180.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 180

................Shift Lever Positions . 181..............Engine Speed Limiter . 183

....................Shift Lock Release . 184Continuously Variable

................Transmission (CVT) . 185.........Maximum Allowable Speed . 187

...........................................Parking . 188..............................Parking Tips . 188

.....................The Braking System . 189.............Brake Wear Indicators . 189

...............Brake System Design . 190.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 190

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 191........................ABS Indicator . 192

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 193...........................Towing a Trailer . 194

Driving

Driving 175

00/08/10 12:19:00 31S5P600_178

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

1.

2.

3.

4. 9.

10.

8.

7.

6.

5.

11.

12.

90

75

16

59

99

177

Preparing to Drive

Driving176

00/08/10 12:19:13 31S5P600_179

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again. An engine is harder to start in cold

weather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

177

00/08/10 12:19:28 31S5P600_180

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the vehicle speed is lowenough that you will not activate theengine speed limiter in the lowergear. On HX, LX, and EX models inthe U.S., and LX and Si models inCanada, make sure the engine speedwill not go into the tachometer’s redzone in the lower gear beforedownshifting.

5-speed Manual Transmission

Driving178

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

00/08/10 12:19:35 31S5P600_181

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)27 mph (43 km/h)39 mph (63 km/h)53 mph (85 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

9 mph (14 km/h)20 mph (32 km/h)33 mph (53 km/h)48 mph (77 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theengine speed by upshifting orslowing down.

Before downshifting, make sure thevehicle speed is low enough that youwill not activate the engine speedlimiter in the lower gear.

Cruise from acceleration

On HX, LX and EX models in the U.S.,LX and Si models in Canada

On DX model


Driving

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

179

00/08/10 12:19:46 31S5P600_182

Your Honda’s transmission has fourforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

This indicator on the instrumentpanel shows which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapid acceler-ation and have the transmissionchecked by an authorized Hondadealer as soon as possible.

To operate the HX model’sContinuously Variable Transmission(CVT), refer to page .185

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Position Indicator

180

UU..SS..:: LLXX,, EEXX,, CCaannaaddaa:: LLXX,, SSii DDXX

00/08/10 12:19:55 31S5P600_183

－

CONTINUED

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

The shift lever has six positions. Itmust be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD, D , 2, N or R, press firmly on thebrake pedal, and keep your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

3

3

3

3


Driving

Shift Lever Positions

Park (P)

181

00/08/10 12:20:04 31S5P600_184

－

－

－If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Press the release buttonbefore shifting into Reverse fromNeutral.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

184


Driving

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

182

00/08/10 12:20:12 31S5P600_185

－－This position is similarto D , except only the first threegears are selected. Use D to provideengine braking when going down asteep hill. D can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears in stop-and-godriving.

For faster acceleration when in D orD , you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down oneor two gears, depending on yourspeed.

To shift to Second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theengine speed by upshifting orslowing down.

43

3

34

On LX and EX models in the U.S., LXand Si models in Canada

On DX model


Driving

Drive (D ) Engine Speed LimiterSecond (2)3

183

00/08/10 12:20:20 31S5P600_186

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror small metal plate (neither areincluded in the tool kit) to removethe cover. Carefully pry off theedge of the cover.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Honda dealer.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.


Driving

Shift Lock Release

184

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKKRREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTTCCOOVVEERR

00/08/10 12:20:33 31S5P600_187

Honda’s Continuously Variableautomatic transmission’s uniquedesign provides a smooth, constantflow of power. It is electronicallycontrolled for more precise operationand better fuel economy.

This indicator on the instrumentpanel shows which position the shiftlever is in.The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapid acceler-ation and have the transmissionchecked by an authorized Hondadealer as soon as possible.

The shift lever has six positions. Itmust be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD, S, L, N or R, press firmly on thebrake pedal and keep your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

CONTINUED

On HX model

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)

Shift Lever Position Indicator Shift Lever Positions

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Driving 185

00/08/10 15:27:12 31S5P600_188

－

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

This positionmechanically locks the transmission.Use Park whenever you are turningoff or starting the engine. To shiftout of Park, you must press on thebrake pedal, have your foot off theaccelerator pedal, and press therelease button on the front of theshift lever.If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.184

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RS to LL to SS to DD to SD to NN to DR to N


Driving

Park (P)

186

00/08/10 12:20:52 31S5P600_189

－

－

－

－

－To shift from Re-verse to Park, see the explanationunder Park. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stopfirst. Press the release button beforeshifting into Reverse from Neutral.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Always shift toPark position if you need to leave thevehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from Neutral toanother position.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically adjusts to keepthe engine at the best speed fordriving conditions. To help theengine warm up faster, the transmis-sion will select ratios that allow theengine to run at higher speeds whenit is cold.

Selecting Secondshifts the transmission into a lowerrange of ratios for better accelera-tion and increased engine braking.Use Second when you are goingdown a steep hill, or in stop-and-godriving.

For faster acceleration when in D, Sor L, the transmission willautomatically ‘‘kick down’’ to a lowerrange of ratios by pushing theaccelerator pedal to the floor.

The CVT shifts automatically tomaintain proper engine speed in anyshift position.

When the vehicle reaches themaximum speed in any shift position,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter (112mph, 180 km/h) in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce thespeed below the maximum.

To shift to Low, pressthe release button on the front of theshift lever. Use Low to get morepower when climbing, and formaximum engine braking whengoing down steep hills.


Driving

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Second (S)

Maximum Allowable Speeds

Low (L)

187

00/08/10 12:21:03 31S5P600_190

－

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

If your car has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the car frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb. If youhave a manual transmission, put it inreverse gear.

Parking Tips

Driving

Parking

188

00/08/10 12:21:15 31S5P600_191

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

All Civics are equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels are drum. A power assisthelps reduce the effort needed onthe brake pedal.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible ‘‘screeching.’’

The front disc brakes on all modelshave audible brake wear indicators.

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving 189

00/08/10 12:21:23 31S5P600_192

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal, it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

The U.S. EX model has an Anti-lockBrake System (ABS) as standardequipment.

ABS helps to prevent the wheelsfrom locking up and skidding duringhard braking, allowing you to retainsteering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump thebrake pedal,

The Braking System

Driving190

FFrroonntt

00/08/10 12:21:33 31S5P600_193

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

CONTINUED

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop the car,

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Important Safety Reminders

The Braking System

Driving 191

00/08/10 12:21:41 31S5P600_194

＊＊

＊＊

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

62

ABS Indicator

The Braking System

Driving192

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

00/08/10 12:21:47 31S5P600_195

－－ Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defrosters and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepage ).

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills. 109

CONTINUED

VisibilityDriving Technique

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 193

00/08/10 12:21:56 31S5P600_196

－ Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

Towing a TrailerTraction

Driving in Bad Weather, Towing a Trailer

Driving194

00/08/10 12:22:04 31S5P600_197

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 196.Important Safety Precautions . 197

.................Maintenance Schedule . 198....................Maintenance Record . 205

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 207..............................Fluid Locations . 208

......................................Engine Oil . 209..................................Adding Oil . 209

....................Recommended Oil . 209..............................Synthetic Oil . 210

....................................Additives . 210.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 211

.............................Cooling System . 213............Adding Engine Coolant . 213

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 215....................Windshield Washers . 219

.......................Transmission Fluid . 220Automatic

.........................Transmission . 2205-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 222................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 223

............................Brake System . 223...........................Clutch System . 223

..............................Power Steering . 224.....................Air Cleaner Element . 225

....................................Hood Latch . 226

....................................Spark Plugs . 227..............................Replacement . 227............................Specifications . 229

...........................................Battery . 230.................................Wiper Blades . 232

..............Air Conditioning System . 234.................Air Conditioning Filter . 235

.....................................Drive Belts . 237....................................Timing Belt . 237

...............................................Tires . 238......................................Inflation . 238

Recommended Tire Pressures...........for Normal Driving . 239

..................................Inspection . 240..............................Maintenance . 240.............................Tire Rotation . 241

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 242......................Wheels and Tires . 243

..........................Winter Driving . 243.............................Snow Tires . 243

...................Traction Devices . 244.............................................Lights . 245

.....................Headlight Aiming . 247........................Replacing Bulbs . 250

...........................Storing Your Car . 254

311

Maintenance

Maintenance

195

00/08/10 12:22:12 31S5P600_198

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance

Maintenance Safety

196

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

00/08/10 12:22:18 31S5P600_199

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

197

00/08/10 12:22:27 31S5P600_200

－

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

Avoid exceeding your car’s loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourcar as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your carMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop-and-go driving.

Driving with a roof rack, or drivingin mountainous conditions.162

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

U.S. Owners

198

00/08/10 12:22:40 31S5P600_201

＃

－

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLYor NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’condition, you should follow theMaintenance Schedule for NormalConditions.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet for

more information.

U.S. Vehicles:

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Canadian Owners

199

00/08/10 12:22:49 31S5P600_202

－

＃＊＊

＃＃

＊

＊

Maintenance200

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

1016

5080

70112

110176

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)

Replace engine oilRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)Replace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots, Suspension componentsDriveshaft boots, Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust system, Fuel lines and connections

Replace air cleaner elementInspect and adjust drive beltsReplace air conditioning filterReplace transmission fluid

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace timing belt, and inspect water pumpInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 84 monthsInspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)Service the following items at the recommended intervals

2032

3048

4064

80128

90144

100160

120192

6096

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 72 months, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 60 monthsReplace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 36 months, then every 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 24 months

Every 36 months (independent of mileage)

24 48 7212 36 60

:1:2:

MTATCVT

199

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

al

Conditi

ons

00/08/10 12:23:08 31S5P600_203

－－

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□

□

□

□□

□

□□□

□

＃

＃

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＃

Maintenance 201

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A

B

C

D

E

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace air conditioning filter.Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 mi/48,000km (independent of time).Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent ofmileage).

10,000 mil/16,000 km/1 yr20,000 mil/32,000 km/1 yr30,000 mil/48,000 km/2 yrs40,000 mil/64,000 km/2 yrs50,000 mil/80,000 km/3 yrs60,000 mil/96,000 km/3 yrs

70,000 mil/112,000 km/4 yrs80,000 mil/128,000 km/4 yrs90,000 mil/144,000 km/5 yrs100,000 mil/160,000 km/5 yrs

Every 110,000 mil/176,000 km,otherwise adjust only if noisy110,000 mil/176,000 km110,000 mil/176,000 km/6 yrs110,000 mil/176,000 km/7 yrs

120,000 mil/192,000 km/6 yrs

At 120,000 mil/192,000 km or120 months,thereafter every 60,000 mil/96,000 km or 60 months

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C, D.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, E.Do items in A, B, C, D,

Replace transmission fluid (CVT) .Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C, D.Do items in A, B.

Replace transmission fluid (CVT) .Inspect valve clearance.

Replace spark plugs.Do items in A, E.

Replace timing belt, inspect water pump.Inspect idle speed.Replace transmission fluid (MT/AT ).

Do items in A, B, C, D.Replace engine coolant.

198

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 72 months, then every90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 60 monthsReplace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 36 months, then every40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 24 monthsSee information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

1:

2:

:199

2

2

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

al

Conditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

00/08/10 12:23:20 31S5P600_204

－

＊＊＊＃

＃＃

＊

＃＊

＊

Maintenance202

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 84 monthsInspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) in dusty conditions,otherwise use normal schedule

Service the following items at the recommended intervals

Replace engine oilRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)Replace engine oil filterInspect front and rear brakesLubricate all door hinges, locks and latches, include the hoodVisually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots, Suspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check engine oil and coolantVisually inspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust system, Fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, Vehicle underbodyCheck parking brake adjustment

Inspect and adjust drive beltsReplace air conditioning filterReplace transmission fluid

Replace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace timing belt , and inspect water pump

Inspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

2032

1016

3048

4064

5080

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

6096

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Refer to page for replacement information under special driving conditions.Refer to page for replacement information under special driving conditions.Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 36 months, then every 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 24 months

Every 36 months (independent of mileage)

24 48 7212 36 60

MTATCVT

1:2:3::

235237

199

1

2

3

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

00/08/10 12:23:41 31S5P600_205

－－

□□□□

□□□□□□□

□□□□□□□

□

□

□

＃

＃

＊

CONTINUEDMaintenance 203

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A

B

C

D

E

F

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.Refer to page 198 to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Replace engine oil.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 237).Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Replace air cleaner element.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace air conditioning filter .Replace brake fluid every 3 years independent ofmilage.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, E.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, D, E.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A, E, F.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace transmission fluid (CVT).

Replace transmission fluid (MT, AT).Do items in A, B, C, D, E.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, E.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace transmission fluid (AT).Do items in A, B, D, E.

5,000 mil/8,000 km/6 mos10,000 mil/16,000 km/1 yr15,000 mil/24,000 km/1-½ yrs20,000 mil/32,000 km/1 yr25,000 mil/40,000 km/2 yrs30,000 mil/48,000 km/2 yrs35,000 mil/56,000 km40,000 mil/64,000 km45,000 mil/72,000 km/3 yrs50,000 mil/80,000 km55,000 mil/88,000 kmAt 60,000 mil/96,000 kmor 36 months,thereafter every 40,000 mil/64,000 km or 24 months60,000 mil/96,000 km/3 yrs

65,000 mil/104,000 km/4 yrs70,000 mil/112,000 km75,000 mil/120,000 km80,000 mil/128,000 km/4 yrs85,000 mil/136,000 km/5 yrs90,000 mil/144,000 km

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

00/08/10 12:23:51 31S5P600_206

/2-½ yrs/2 yrs

/3 yrs/3-½ yrs

/4 yrs/4-½ yrs

/5 yrs

E.

□□

□□

□

□

＊

＊＃

Maintenance204

See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.information under special driving conditions.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, if noisy.

NOTE:

237

1: See air conditioning filter on page235 for replacement

2::

199

95,000 mi/152,000 km100,000 mi/160,000 km

105,000 mi/168,000 km/6 yrs110,000 mil/176,000 km

110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs

115,000 mi/184,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km

Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.

Do items in A, E, F.Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.Replace spark plugs.

Replace timing belt , inspect water pump. Inspect idle speed.

＃＊Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.Replace transmission fluid (MT, AT).

Do items in A, B, C, D,Replace engine coolant.

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)

00/08/10 12:23:59 31S5P600_207

/5-½ yrs/5 yrs

100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs □Replace transmission fluid (CVT).

110,000 mi/176,000 km/7 yrs

/6-½ yrs

/10 yrs

＃

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

205

5,000 mi

10,000 mi

15,000 mi

20,000 mi

25,000 mi

30,000 mi

35,000 mi

40,000 mi

45,000 mi

50,000 mi

55,000 mi

60,000 mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp8,000 km

16,000 km

24,000 km

32,000 km(or 1 year)

40,000 km

48,000 km

56,000 km

64,000 km(or 2 years)

72,000 km

80,000 km

88,000 km


mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

202200

00/08/10 12:24:08 31S5P600_208

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

206

65,000 mi

70,000 mi

75,000 mi

80,000 mi

85,000 mi

90,000 mi

95,000 mi

100,000 mi

105,000 mi

110,000 mi

115,000 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp104,000 km

112,000 km

120,000 km


136,000 km

144,000 km

152,000 km


168,000 km

176,000 km

184,000 km


mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

00/08/10 12:24:18 31S5P600_209

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

166

167

219

220

223

238

245

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 207

00/08/10 12:24:27 31S5P600_210

Fluid Locations

Maintenance208

CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNFFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((OOrraannggee lloooopp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLFFIILLLL CCAAPP

EENNGGIINNEECCOOOOLLAANNTTRREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN FFLLUUIIDDDDIIPPSSTTIICCKK ((CCVVTT))((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGFFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD((BBlluuee ccaapp))

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

00/08/10 12:24:33 31S5P600_211

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

CONTINUED

Recommended OilAdding Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 209

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLFFIILLLL CCAAPP

AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL

00/08/10 12:24:43 31S5P600_212

The SAE number tells you the oil’sviscosity or weight. Select the oil foryour vehicle according to this chart.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30oil may be used. However, it shouldbe replaced with 5W-20 at the nextoil change.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil

Additives

210

AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree

00/08/10 12:24:52 31S5P600_213

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

4.

3.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance 211

WWAASSHHEERR OOIILL FFIILLTTEERRDDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

00/08/10 12:25:04 31S5P600_214

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

(U.S.: DX, LX, Canada: DX, LX)

(U.S.: EX)


(U.S.: EX, HX)

Engine Oil

Maintenance212

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

3.4 US qt (3.2 , 2.8 Imp qt)

3.7 US qt (3.5 , 3.1 Imp qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

00/08/10 12:25:14 31S5P600_215

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.This coolant should always be amixture of 50 percent antifreeze and50 percent water. Never add straightantifreeze or plain water.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing.

If it is not available, you may useanother major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

1.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 213

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

00/08/10 12:25:25 31S5P600_216

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car’s coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Cooling System

Maintenance214

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

00/08/10 12:25:34 31S5P600_217

CONTINUED

Remove the radiator cap.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control dial tomaximum heat. Turn off theignition. Open the hood. Makesure the engine and radiator arecool to the touch.

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Remove the drainbolt and washer from the engineblock.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic.

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

1. 3.

2.

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 215

00/08/10 12:25:45 31S5P600_218

－＋

＋－

Disconnect the battery cablesfrom the terminals. Disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, thenthe positive ( ) cable.

Remove the bolt and nut, thenremove the battery case.

Remove the reserve tankmounting bolt. Remove thereserve tank and drain the coolant.Put the tank back in place, makingsure its bottom tab is in the holder.Reinstall the bolt.

Reinstall the battery and batterycase. Secure them with the boltand nut.

Reconnect the battery cables tothe terminals. Connect the positive( ) cable first, then the negative( ) cable.

Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Remove the battery.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the audio system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’in the frequency display. Use thePreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (see page ).

4.

6.

7.

5.

8.

9.

159

On U.S. EX and Canadian LX and Si

Cooling System

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

216

NNUUTT BBOOLLTT

BBOOLLTT

TTAABB

00/08/10 15:27:26 31S5P600_219

Tightening torque:

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug in thebottom of the radiator. Apply non-hardening sealant to the drain boltthreads, put a new washer on thedrain bolt, and reinstall the drainbolt in the engine block. Tighten itsecurely.

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.

The cooling system capacity is:10.

11.

CONTINUED

With 5-speed manual transmission:

With automatic transmission:

With automatic transmission (CVT):

Cooling System

Maintenance 217

FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK

FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree

58 lbf·ft (78 N·m , 8.0 kgf·m)

1.03 US gal (3.9 , 0.86 Imp gal)

1.00 US gal (3.8 , 0.84 Imp gal)

1.00 US gal (3.8 , 0.84 Imp gal)

00/08/10 15:27:38 31S5P600_220

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the radiator fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator fan comes on twotimes. Then stop the engine.

Remove the radiator cap. Fill theradiator with coolant up to thebase of the filler neck.

Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

Check the level in the radiator,add coolant if needed.

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

12.

13.

14.

15.

Cooling System

Maintenance218

00/08/10 12:26:20 31S5P600_221

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the driver’s sideheadlight. Check the reservoir’s fluidlevel by removing the cap andlooking at the level gauge attachedto the cap.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).63

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

Maintenance 219

LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

00/08/10 12:26:29 31S5P600_222

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.Park the car on level ground. Shut

off the engine. For accurateresults, wait at least 60 seconds,and no more than 90 seconds,after shutting off the engine tocheck the fluid level.

3.

4.

1.

2.


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance220

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

UUPPPPEERRMMAARRKKLLOOWWEERRMMAARRKK

UUPPPPEERRMMAARRKKLLOOWWEERRMMAARRKK

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK ((CCVVTT))

CCVVTT

00/08/10 12:26:39 31S5P600_223

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the filler holeto bring it to the upper mark.Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit is not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

5. 6.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 221

00/08/10 12:26:47 31S5P600_224

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an API service SG, SH or SJgrade motor oil with a viscosity ofSAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as atemporary replacement. An SGgrade is preferred, but an SH or SJgrade may be used if SG is notavailable. However, motor oil doesnot contain the proper additives andcontinued use can cause stiffershifting. Replace as soon as it isconvenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in the mainte-nance schedule.

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the car sitting onlevel ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda Manual Transmis-sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts torun out of the hole. Reinstall thefiller bolt and tighten it securely.


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance222

FFIILLLLEERR BBOOLLTT

CCoorrrreecctt LLeevveell

00/08/10 12:26:56 31S5P600_225

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The fluid should be between theMIN and MAX marks on the side ofthe reservoir. If it is not, add brakefluid to bring it up to that level. Usethe same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Always use Honda DOT 3 brakefluid. If it is not available, you shoulduse only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, froma sealed container, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaDOT 3 brake fluid as soon aspossible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car’s brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

Brake System Clutch System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance 223

MMAAXX

MMIINN

MMIINN

MMAAXX

00/08/10 12:27:07 31S5P600_226

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

You should check the fluid level inthe power steering reservoir at leastonce a year. Check the level whenthe engine is cold. Look at the sideof the reservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Power Steering

Maintenance224

UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL

LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

00/08/10 12:27:14 31S5P600_227

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing in the enginecompartment.

To replace it:

Loosen the seven bolts andremove the air cleaner housingcover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement. Reinstall the air cleaner housing

cover, tighten the seven bolts.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

Replacement

Maintenance

Air Cleaner Element

225

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTT

BBOOLLTTSS

BBOOLLTTSS

00/08/10 12:27:25 31S5P600_228

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts, including the pivot.Follow the time and distancerecommendations in theMaintenance Schedule. If you arenot sure how to clean and grease thelatch, contact your Honda dealer.

Maintenance

Hood Latch

226

PPIIVVOOTTSS

00/08/10 12:27:30 31S5P600_229

The spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Remove the cover by turning thetwo clips one quarter turncounterclockwise.

Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Use a wrench to remove the nutholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Spark Plugs

Replacement

227

CCLLIIPPSS

00/08/10 12:27:40 31S5P600_230

Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

5. 6. 7.

Spark Plugs

Maintenance228

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

00/08/10 12:27:48 31S5P600_231

＋－

Spark Plug Gap:

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Reinstall the cover.

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe nut.

NGK:DENSO:

8.

11.

10.

9.

Maintenance

Spark Plugs

Specifications:

229

PZFR6F-11PKJ20CR-M11

0.04 in (1.1 mm) 00.1 mm

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

00/08/10 12:27:58 31S5P600_232

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator’s colors.

Check the condition of your car’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

230

TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW

00/08/10 12:28:06 31S5P600_233

－

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car’selectrical system.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the audio system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’in the frequency display. Use thePreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (see page ).159

On U.S. EX and Canadian LX and Si

Battery

Maintenance 231

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar’s electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables bef ore connecting thebattery to a charger.

00/08/10 12:28:14 31S5P600_234

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

To replace the blade:

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance232

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

LLOOCCKK TTAABB

00/08/10 12:28:22 31S5P600_235

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 233

BBLLAADDEE

BBLLAADDEE

RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

00/08/10 12:28:31 31S5P600_236

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently.

295

On U.S. LX and EX, Canadian LXmodels

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance234

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

00/08/10 12:28:39 31S5P600_237

To replace it:

The air conditioning filter is locatedbehind the glove box.

Open the glove box. Remove thehooks on the side panels by pullingout on the tabs. Pivot the glovebox out of the way.

Remove the air conditioning filtercover by pushing in on the lock tab,then pulling the cover toward you.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theheating and cooling system becomesless than usual.

The air conditioning filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

On U.S. LX and EX models, and LXmodel in Canada

Maintenance

Replacement

Air Conditioning Filter

235

HHOOOOKKSS

TTAABB

CCOOVVEERR

00/08/10 12:28:49 31S5P600_238

Remove the first filter by pulling itstraight out of the air conditioningunit. Remove the second filter bysliding it to the left, then pulling itout.

Install the new filters. Reinstall thecover.

Pivot the glove box up intoposition. Reinstall the hooks intothe side panel of the glove box.Close the glove box.

3.

4.

5.

Maintenance

Air Conditioning Filter

236

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG FFIILLTTEERRSS

00/08/10 12:28:56 31S5P600_239

－－－－

－－

－－

Check the tension of each belt bypushing on it with your thumbmidway between the pulleys.

The belts should have the following‘‘play’’ or deflection. The timing belt should normally be

replaced at the intervals shown inthe maintenance schedule.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Replace this belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:

Check the condition of the two drivebelts. Examine the edges of eachbelt for cracks or fraying.

Power steering belt:

Alternator belt(On cars without A/C):

Compressor belt(On cars with A/C):

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

0.20 0.30 in (5.0 7.5 mm)

Drive Belts Timing Belt

Drive Belts, Timing Belt

Maintenance 237

AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG BBEELLTT

0.35 0.49 in (9.0 12.5 mm)

0.22 0.31 in (5.5 8.0 mm)

00/08/10 12:29:09 31S5P600_240

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the car has been drivenseveral miles), you will see readings4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance238

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

00/08/10 12:29:18 31S5P600_241

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

(U.S.: EX, Canada: Si)

(U.S.: DX, HX, LX, Canada: DX, LX)

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tires

Maintenance

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

239

P185/65R15 86H 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1kgf/cm )

P185/70R14 87S

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

00/08/10 15:27:51 31S5P600_242

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Your car’s tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

Inspection Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance240

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

00/08/10 12:29:41 31S5P600_243

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance 241

((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

FFrroonntt FFrroonntt

Improper wheel weights can damageyour car’s aluminum wheels. Use onlyGenuine Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

00/08/10 12:29:49 31S5P600_244

The tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy. It is best to replace all four tires at

the same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car’s handling.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the car. Tire size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to workinconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your car. Replacementwheels are available at your Hondadealer.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance242

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

00/08/10 12:29:57 31S5P600_245

＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

(U.S.: HX)


(U.S.: DX, HX, LX, Canada: DX,LX)



296

CONTINUED

Snow TiresWheels and Tires Winter Driving

Tires

Maintenance 243

14 x 5 1/2 JJ

15 x 6 JJ

14 x 5 V2 JJ

P185/70R14 87S

P185/65R15 86H

00/08/10 12:30:10 31S5P600_246

Mount traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Installthem only on the front tires.

Because your Honda has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should notbe used. No matter how tight theyseem to be installed, they can comeinto contact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

When installing traction devices,follow the manufacturer’sinstructions and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withthem installed. If you hear themcoming in contact with the body orchassis, stop and investigate. Makesure the traction devices areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brakes orsuspension.Remove them as soon as you startdriving on cleared roads.

Tires

Maintenance

Traction Devices

244

Cables that are the wrong size orimproperly installed can damage yourcar’s brake lines, suspension, body, andwheels. Stop driving if they are hittingany part of the car.

00/08/10 12:30:17 31S5P600_247

Check the operation of your car’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance 245

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR

00/08/10 12:30:23 31S5P600_248

Check the following:

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount stop lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

295

Lights

Maintenance246

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTTSSTTOOPP//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT

SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTTSSTTOOPP LLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT

LLIICCEENNSSEE PPLLAATTEELLIIGGHHTTSS

00/08/10 15:29:34 31S5P600_249

Open the hood.If you need to change the head-light bulb on the driver’s side,remove the power steeringreservoir tank by pulling it out ofits holder.

Your car has halogen headlightbulbs, one on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its steelbase and protect the glass fromcontact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment of the headlights shouldbe performed by a Honda technicianor other qualified mechanic.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming

Lights

Maintenance 247

HHOOLLDDEERR

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

00/08/10 12:30:40 31S5P600_250

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Reinstall the power steeringreservoir.

(Driver’s side)

Push the electrical connector ontothe tabs of the new bulb. Makesure it locks in place.Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.Make sure it is right side up; it ismarked ‘‘TOP.’’

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way and remove the bulb.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector on both sides to unlockthe tab. Pull the connector straightoff.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Turn Signal and Parking LightBulb

Lights

Maintenance248

WWEEAATTHHEERR SSEEAALL BBUULLBB

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR HHOOLLDD--DDOOWWNN WWIIRREE

00/08/10 12:30:52 31S5P600_251

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover back.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clip. Lock it inplace by pushing on the center.

3.

2. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

Maintenance 249

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP

00/08/10 12:31:03 31S5P600_252

Open the trunk. Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight/sidemarker light or turn signal light.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Remove the screw in the center ofthe fastener on the side of thetrunk lining. Pull the lining back.

Put the fastener into the hole onthe side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screw.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

Lights

Maintenance250

FFAASSTTEENNEERR

00/08/10 12:31:15 31S5P600_253

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by squeezing the tabs onboth sides of the socket.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks. Make surethe new bulb is working.

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

2.

1.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance 251

00/08/10 12:31:27 31S5P600_254

Put the light assembly back intothe hole, right side first. Push onthe left side until it snaps intoplace.

Pull the bulb straight out of theholder. Push the new bulb straightinto the holder until it bottoms.

Remove the trunk light assemblyby using a small flat-tippedscrewdriver to pry carefully on theleft edge of the assembly.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Reinstall the socket back in placeby pushing it in until it latches.

2.

3.

1.

3.

4.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance252

00/08/10 12:31:35 31S5P600_255

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens inthe middle with a fingernail file ora small flat-tip screwdriver. Do notpry on the edge of the housingaround the lens.

Although the ceiling light andspotlights come apart the same way,they do not use the same type ofbulbs.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Spotlights:Pry on the edge between the lenses.

2.

3.

1.

On LX models

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLights

Lights

Maintenance 253

CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT FFRROONNTT CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

LLXX

SSPPOOTTLLIIGGHHTTSS

UU..SS..:: EEXX,, CCaannaaddaa:: SSii

00/08/10 12:31:46 31S5P600_256

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Honda dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months maintenance schedule(Normal Conditions) as soon as youtake it out of storage (see page ).The replacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the car has actuallyreached that time or mileage.

211

200

Storing Your Car

Maintenance254

00/08/10 12:32:00 31S5P600_257

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 256.....................................Washing . 256

.......................................Waxing . 257..........................Paint Touch-up . 257

..................................Interior Care . 258...................................Carpeting . 258.................................Floor Mats . 258

.........................................Fabric . 259...........................................Vinyl . 259

...................................Seat Belts . 259....................................Windows . 260

..........................Air Fresheners . 260....................Corrosion Protection . 261

.................................Body Repairs . 262

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 255

00/08/10 12:32:05 31S5P600_258

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Frequent washing helps preserveyour car’s beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

257

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

256

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

00/08/10 12:32:16 31S5P600_259

－

－

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. Youshould use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Always wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your car frequently for chipsor scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing Paint Touch-up

257

00/08/10 12:32:26 31S5P600_260

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you replace it, use a genuineHonda floor mat that is designed tobe used with the floor mat anchor inyour car.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your car.

The genuine Honda driver’s floormat was designed to hook over thefloor mat anchor. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If equippedCarpeting Floor Mats

Appearance Care

Interior Care

258

00/08/10 12:32:35 31S5P600_261

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

Fabric

Vinyl

Seat Belts

Interior Care

Appearance Care 259

LLOOOOPP

00/08/10 12:32:44 31S5P600_262

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces. If you use a liquid air freshener,

make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

Windows Air Fresheners

Interior Care

Appearance Care260

The rear window def ogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

00/08/10 12:32:52 31S5P600_263

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Carsequipped with ABS have a sensorand wiring at each wheel. Becareful not to damage them.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care 261

00/08/10 12:33:02 31S5P600_264

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant genuine Honda parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Take your car to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body repairs can affect your car’sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesgenuine Honda replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Honda body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care262

00/08/10 12:33:08 31S5P600_265

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 264....................Changing a Flat Tire . 265

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 271Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very

.....................................Slowly . 271The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 272

................................Jump Starting . 273............If Your Engine Overheats . 275

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 278..........Charging System Indicator . 279

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 280.......................Readiness Codes . 281

...............Brake System Indicator . 282..................Closing the Moonroof . 283

..............................................Fuses . 284..........Checking and Replacing . 285

......................Emergency Towing . 290

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 263

00/08/10 12:33:13 31S5P600_266

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your car as soon as you can.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected264

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

00/08/10 12:33:24 31S5P600_267

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Park the car on firm, level andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire


SSPPAARREE TTIIRREE TTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR

TTOOOOLL KKIITT JJAACCKK

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

00/08/10 12:33:34 31S5P600_268

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen the four wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

Find the jacking point nearest thewheel you are removing. Place thejack under the jacking point. Turnthe end bracket clockwise untilthe top of the jack contacts thejacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

6. 7. 8.



266

JJAACCKK

WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH

JJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTTSS

00/08/10 12:33:42 31S5P600_269

CONTINUED

Remove the wheel nuts and wheelcover. The wheel cover cannot beremoved without first removingthe wheel nuts. Do not attempt toforcibly pry the wheel cover offwith a screwdriver or other tool.

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise the caruntil the flat tire is off the ground.

Remove the flat tire. Temporarilyplace the flat tire on the groundwith the outside surface of thewheel facing up. You could scratchthe wheel if you put it face down.

9. 10. 11.



WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

WWHHEEEELLNNUUTTSS

WWHHEEEELL CCOOVVEERRWWHHEEEELL NNUUTTSS

00/08/10 12:33:51 31S5P600_270

Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

12. 13. 14.



268

BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB

00/08/10 12:33:59 31S5P600_271

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

15. 16. 17.

18.

19.

CONTINUED

On HX model in the U.S., Si model inCanada



WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT SSPPAACCEERRCCOONNEE

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

00/08/10 12:34:10 31S5P600_272

Store the jack in the trunk with theend bracket on the left side. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tool kit.

Store the wheel cover in the trunk.Make sure it does not getscratched or damaged.

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

20.

21.

22.



Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack and toolssecurely before driving.

00/08/10 12:34:16 31S5P600_273

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page ).

273

230

273

289

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If Your Engine Won’t Start


00/08/10 12:34:27 31S5P600_274

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).80

177

285

289Emergency

Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

If Your Engine Won’t Start


00/08/10 12:34:36 31S5P600_275

If your car’s battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.

1.

2.

230

CONTINUED

Jump Starting


A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

00/08/10 12:34:46 31S5P600_276

－＋

＋

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourHonda’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

3. 4. 6.

5.

Jump Starting


BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYY

00/08/10 12:34:55 31S5P600_277

Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the car until all are disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

7.

CONTINUED

If Your Engine Overheats

Jump Starting, If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

00/08/10 12:35:04 31S5P600_278

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and coolingsystem and all other accessories.Turn on the hazard warningindicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

167

289Emergency

Towing



00/08/10 12:35:13 31S5P600_279

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

8. 9.

10.

11.

12.

289Emergency

Towing



Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

00/08/10 12:35:22 31S5P600_280

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page ). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)1.

2.

3.

4.

166

209

289Emergency

Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe car stopped.

00/08/10 12:35:31 31S5P600_281

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

Charging System Indicator


CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

00/08/10 12:35:37 31S5P600_282

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes one driving trip.

If the indicator remains on past onedriving trip, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour car’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour car to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp



If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car’s emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car’s warranties.

00/08/10 12:35:45 31S5P600_283

Your car has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. To check ifthey are set, turn the ignition ON (II),but do not start the engine. TheMalfunction Indicator Lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. See StateEmissions Testing on page .301

Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


00/08/10 12:35:51 31S5P600_284

＊＊

＊＊ Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

223289

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

00/08/10 12:36:00 31S5P600_285

Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Remove the wrench. Replace theround plug.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

3.

285

Closing the Moonroof


RROOUUNNDD PPLLUUGG

SSOOCCKKEETT

00/08/10 12:36:10 31S5P600_286

All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in two fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe steering column. To open it, turnthe knobs as shown.

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the engine compartment on thepassenger’s side. To open it, pushthe tabs as shown.

Fuses


TTAABB

UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD IINNTTEERRIIOORR

00/08/10 12:36:17 31S5P600_287

If something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

3.1.

2.

4.

287 288

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


FFUUSSEE

BBLLOOWWNN

FFUUSSEE PPUULLLLEERR

00/08/10 12:36:28 31S5P600_288

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

5.

6.

159

On U.S. EX and Canadian LX and Simodels

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

00/08/10 12:36:37 31S5P600_289

－

－－

Amps.No. Circuits Protected

CONTINUED

20 A15 A7.5 A20 A10 A15 A15 A20 A10 A40 A30 A40 A40 A40 A15 A20 A15 A

80 A40 A

1234567891011121314151617181920

Condenser FanSmall LightInterior LightCooling FanHazardFI ECUHorn StopABS F/SBack UpABS MotorRear DefrosterHeater MotorPower WindowOptionLeft HeadlightDoor LockRight HeadlightNot UsedBatteryIgnition 1Spare Fuses21 25

Fuses


UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

00/08/10 12:36:44 31S5P600_290

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

: On Canadian models

12345

15 A20 A10 A10 A

Ignition CoilLAF HeaterDaytime running lightsAlternatorNot Used

678910111213141516171819202122232425

7.5 A20 A7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A

15 A15 A7.5 A20 A

20 A20 A

Power Window RelayMoonroofAccessory, RadioNot UsedMeterABSDaytime running lightsSRSRemote Control MirrorsNot UsedNot UsedFuel PumpAccessory Power SocketTurn LightsFront WiperNot UsedFront Right Power WindowFront Left Power WindowNot UsedNot Used

Fuses


INTERIOR FUSE BOX

00/08/10 12:36:52 31S5P600_291

－

－

－

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car’s suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.

If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following:

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.


5-speed Manual Transmission andContinuously Variable Transmission(CVT)

CONTINUED

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This isan acceptable way to tow yourHonda.

This is the best way to transportyour Honda.

This method of towing isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing


Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourcar must be transported with the f rontwheels of f the ground.

00/08/10 12:37:03 31S5P600_292

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the car no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your car is equipped with a frontspoiler, remove it before towing so itis not damaged.

Emergency Towing


Trying to lif t or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

00/08/10 12:37:10 31S5P600_293

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 292................................Specifications . 294

DOT Tire Quality Grading.............................(U.S. Cars) . 296

.................................Treadwear . 296......................................Traction . 296

.............................Temperature . 297.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 298

......Driving in Foreign Countries . 299

.......................Emissions Controls . 300.....................The Clean Air Act . 300

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 300

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 300

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 301

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 301....................PGM-FI System . 301

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 301

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 301

....................Replacement Parts . 301..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 302

..............State Emissions Testing . 303....Testing of Readiness Codes . 303

Technical Information

Technical Information 291

00/08/10 12:37:15 31S5P600_294

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver’s side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information292

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL

00/08/10 12:37:21 31S5P600_295

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers


EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNNNUUMMBBEERR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

00/08/10 12:37:27 31S5P600_296

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

Specifications


Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Capacities

174.7 in (4,438 mm)66.7 in (1,695 mm)55.1 in (1,399 mm)103.1 in (2,620 mm)57.9 in (1,470 mm)57.9 in (1,470 mm)

2.95 x 3.72 in (75.0 x 94.4 mm)

13.2 US gal (50 , 11.0 Imp gal)

101.7 cu-in (1,668 cm )9.59.9

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratio

Spark plugs

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC , SOHC VTEC

4-cylinder gasoline engine

See spark plug maintenancesection page 225 .

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.108 US gal (0.41 , 0.090 Imp gal)

4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)6.0 US qt (5.7 , 5.0 Imp qt)6.3 US qt (6.0 , 5.3 Imp qt)3.3 US qt (3.1 , 2.7 Imp qt)2.9 US qt (2.7 , 2.4 Imp qt)1.7 US qt (1.6 , 1.4 Imp qt)1.6 US qt (1.5 , 1.3 Imp qt)4.4 US qt (4.2 , 3.7 Imp qt)3.5 US qt (3.3 , 2.9 Imp qt)3.2 US qt (3.0 , 2.6 Imp qt)3.7 US qt (3.5 , 3.1 Imp qt)3.4 US qt (3.2 , 2.8 Imp qt)

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Automatictransmissionfluid

1.03 US gal (3.9 , 0.86 Imp gal)1.00 US gal (3.8 , 0.84 Imp gal)1.00 US gal (3.8 , 0.84 Imp gal)

1.32 US gal (5.0 , 1.10 Imp gal)1.29 US gal (4.9 , 1.08 Imp gal)1.29 US gal (4.9 , 1.08 Imp gal)

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

U.S.: DX, LXCanada: DX, LXU.S.: HX, EXCanada: Si

5 :

1 :

2 :3 :4 : HX

DX, LXEX, HX

ChangeManualAutomaticCVT

TotalManualAutomaticCVT

Change

Without filter

TotalChangeTotalChange

Total

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

1 2

1

2

1

2

3

4

3

4

5

5

Manual trans-mission fluid

Including filter

Windshieldwasher reservoir

00/08/10 15:29:55 31S5P600_297

－－

－

－－

＊＊

－－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications


Battery

Fuses

Tires

Alignment

Air Conditioning

Lights

HFC-134a (R-134a)17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

SP-10

12 V12 V

60/55 W (HB2)21/5 W

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )12 V 5 W12 V 8 W12 V 5 W12 V 5 W12 V 8 W12 V 5 W12 V 21 W12 V 3 CP12 V 21 W

12 V 21/5 W12 V 21 W12 V 3 CP

12 V 36 AH/5 HRCapacity

Interior

Under-hood

Size

Pressure

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 1°33’45’

0°

0.00 in (0.0 mm)

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

T115/70D14 88MP185/65R15 86HP185/70R14 87S

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant oil type

See page 285 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.See page 284 or the fuse boxcover.

0.08 in ( 2.0 mm)

T125/70D15 95M

Headlights (HI/LO)Front turn signal/side markerlightsFront parking lightRear turn signal lightsStop/Taillights/Rear sidemarker lightsBack-up lightsTaillightsHigh-mount stop lightLicense plate lightsCeiling lightFront ceiling lightSpotlights

Trunk light

FrontRearFrontRearFront

1 : EX2 : LX

Front/Rear

Spare

Front/RearSpare

1 :

2 :

3 :

U.S.: DX, HX and LXCanada: DX, LXU.S.: EXCanada: SiU.S.: EX and LX with ABSCanada: SiABS equipped models (DX, LX)

1

1

2

1

2

1

3

00/08/10 12:38:11 31S5P600_298

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


00/08/10 12:38:22 31S5P600_299

－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

Temperature A, B, C


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

297

00/08/10 12:38:27 31S5P600_300

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

ETHANOL

MTBE

METHANOL

Oxygenated Fuels


00/08/10 12:38:36 31S5P600_301

If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


00/08/10 12:38:41 31S5P600_302

＊

＊

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

The burning of gasoline in your car’sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

Your car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine’scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive CrankcaseVentilation valve routes them from

the crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

194

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions Controls


00/08/10 12:38:51 31S5P600_303

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control and ThreeWay Catalytic Converter. Thesethree systems work together tocontrol the engine’s combustion andminimize the amount of HC, CO, andNOx that comes out the tailpipe. Theexhaust emissions control systemsare separate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

2

2

Replacement PartsOnboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Exhaust Emissions Controls

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Ignition Timing Control System

Emissions Controls


00/08/10 12:39:04 31S5P600_304

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car’s three way catalyticconverter.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

(EX) (DX, LX, HX)

Three Way Catalytic Converter


TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR

00/08/10 12:39:13 31S5P600_305

CONTINUED

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not complete thetest. This is because of certain‘‘readiness codes’’ that must be set inthe on-board diagnostics for theemissions systems. These codes areerased when the battery isdisconnected, and set again onlyafter several days of driving under avariety of conditions.


State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

303

00/08/10 12:39:24 31S5P600_306

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).


State Emissions Testing

304

00/08/10 12:39:29 31S5P600_307

Customer Relations................................Information . 306

...................U.S. Zone Office Map . 307.............Canada Zone Office Map . 308

....................Warranty Coverages . 309Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 310.....................Authorized Manuals . 311

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 305

00/08/10 12:39:33 31S5P600_308

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Zone Office.Refer to the U.S. and Canadian ZoneOffice maps on the following pages.

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your carDate of purchaseMileage on your carYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thecar to you

292


Customer Relations Information

306

00/08/10 12:39:39 31S5P600_309

６

７

８

９

１０

１５

１

２

３

４

５


U.S. Zone Office Map

307

ZONE 1

ZONE 9

ZONE 6

ZONE 3

ZONE 10

ZONE 7

ZONE 5

ZONE 2

ZONE 15

ZONE 4ZONE 2 ZONE 8

Mid-Atlantic Zone902 Wind River Ln., Suite 200

Gaithersburg, Maryland 20878(301) 990-2020

Southeastern ZoneP.O. Box 1606

1500 Morrison ParkwayAlpharetta, Georgia 30009-1606(770) 442-2045

West Central Zone1600 South Abilene Street, Suite D

Aurora, Colorado 80012(303) 696-3935

Puerto Rico and U.S. V.I.Bella International

P.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816(787) 250-4318

Western ZoneP.O. Box 2260

700 Van Ness AvenueTorrance, California90501-1490(310) 781-4565

Northwestern ZoneP.O. Box 20186

12439 N.E. Airport WayPortland, Oregon 97230(503) 256-0943(also includes Alaska andHawaii)

South Central Zone4529 Royal Lane

Irving, Texas 75063(972) 929-5481

Northeastern Zone115 Gaither Drive

Mt. Laurel, New Jersey 08054(856) 235-5533Includes: NYC Metro area andFairfield County, CT area

Central Zone101 South Stanfield Road

Troy, Ohio 45373(937) 332-6250

North Central Zone601 Campus Drive, Suite A-9

Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004(847) 870-5600

New England Zone555 Old County Road

Windsor Locks, Connecticut 06096(860) 623-3310See Zone 5 for: NYC Metro area andFairfield County, CT area

The addresses and telephone numbers are subject to change. If you cannotreach your Zone office, ask your Honda dealer for the current information.

00/08/10 12:39:57 31S5P600_310

Canada Zone Office Map

Warranty and Customer Relations308

Honda Canada Inc.National Office

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

00/08/10 12:40:02 31S5P600_311

－－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns the car.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2001 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2001 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 309

00/08/10 12:40:15 31S5P600_312

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Warranty and Customer Relations310

00/08/10 12:40:20 31S5P600_313

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００１

ＨＯＮ

The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

311

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61S5A00

61S5A01

61S5A00EL

61S5A30

31S5P600

HON-R

Form Description

2001 Honda Civic 4 Door

Service Manual Base Book


Service Manual Supplement

2001 Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2001 Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Body Repair Manual


Owner’s Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$66.00

$36.00

$46.00

$42.00

$30.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring

obligation.

00/08/10 12:40:32 31S5P600_314

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

312

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

00/08/10 12:40:40 31S5P600_315

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 169................................Accessories . 169

...Additional Safety Precaution . 170............................Modifications . 170

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 82

.............Accessory Power Socket . 103....................Additives, Engine Oil . 209

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 48.....................Air Cleaner Element . 225

..............Air Conditioning System . 108......................Maintenance . 234, 235

.........................................Usage . 108.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 110.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 238

.........................Normal Driving . 239.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 298

......................................Antifreeze . 213Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

....................Indicator Light . 62, 192...................................Operation . 190

Anti-theft Steering Column..............................................Lock . 82

..........................Appearance Care . 255

................Audio System . 116, 128, 140...............Automatic Speed Control . 76

..............Automatic Transmission . 180..........................Capacity, Fluid . 294

...............Checking Fluid Level . 220.......................................Shifting . 181

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 180................Shift Lever Positions . 181

....................Shift Lock Release . 184

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 278............................Jump Starting . 273

..............................Maintenance . 230............................Specifications . 294

..............................Before Driving . 161....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 44

...........................Beverage Holder . 102.................................Body Repairs . 262

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 190

.............Break-in, New Linings . 162............Bulb Replacement . 250, 251

...........................................Fluid . 223.......................................Parking . 100

.................System Indicator . 62, 282........................Wear Indicators . 189

.............................Braking System . 189........................Break-in, New Car . 162

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 71........................Brights, Headlights . 70

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 251

..............................Brake Lights . 250

..............................Ceiling Light . 253................Front Parking Lights . 248

........Front Side Marker Lights . 248.................................Headlights . 247

.........High-mount Brake Light . 251.................License Plate Lights . 251

.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 250............................Specifications . 294

...................................Spotlights . 253...............................Trunk Light . 252

....................Turn Signal Lights . 248..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 247

Index

A

B

I

00/08/10 12:40:46 31S5P600_316

＊

............................Capacities Chart . 294.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

...................................Cargo Hook . 104.............................Carrying Cargo . 171

Cassette Player............................................Care . 158

...................Operation . 122, 134, 155..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

..................CD Changer . 125, 137, 151......................CD Player . 125, 137, 149

..................................Ceiling Light . 105........................Certification Label . 292

............................................Chains . 244....................Changing a Flat Tire . 265

............Changing Engine Coolant . 215Changing Oil

........................................How to . 211......................................When to . 198

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 279............Checklist, Before Driving . 176

.....................................Child Safety . 21Child Seats

.......................Lower Anchorage . 42..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41

....................Cleaner Element, Air . 225Cleaning

......................................Exterior . 256.......................................Interior . 258

...................................Seat Belts . 259...........................................Vinyl . 259

....................................Windows . 260.........Clock, Setting the . 121, 133, 143

...................................Clutch Fluid . 223........................CO in the Exhaust . 303

......................................Coat Hook . 104............Cold Weather, Starting in . 177

..............................Compact Spare . 264...............Consumer Information . 306

.............Controls, Instruments and . 57Coolant

........................................Adding . 213....................................Checking . 167

.........................Proper Solution . 213...................................Replacing . 215

...................Temperature Gauge . 68....................Corrosion Protection . 261

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 300

..............Cruise Control Operation . 76..........Customer Relations Office . 306

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 58

................Daytime Running Lights . 71............Defects, Reporting Safety . 310

........................Defog and Defrost . 113................Defogger, Rear Window . 74..............Defrosting the Windows . 113

....................................Dimensions . 294...............Dimming the Headlights . 71

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 220

..................................Engine Oil . 166..........................Directional Signals . 72

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 189.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 212

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 83

......................Power Door Locks . 84..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296

Downshifting, 5-speed Manual.............................Transmission . 178

.....................................Drive Belts . 237...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

Index

C D

II

00/08/10 12:40:51 31S5P600_317

CONTINUED

...........................................Driving . 175....................................Economy . 168

.........................In Bad Weather . 193................In Foreign Countries . 299

..............................Economy, Fuel . 168............Emergencies on the Road . 289.............Battery, Jump Starting . 273...........Brake System Indicator . 282

................Changing a Flat Tire . 265.....Charging System Indicator . 279

..................Checking the Fuses . 285.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 278...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 280...Manually Closing Moonroof . 282

..................Overheated Engine . 275.........................Emergency Brake . 100

......................Emergency Flashers . 74......................Emergency Towing . 289

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 89.......................Emissions Controls . 300

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68

.................................Drive Belts . 237

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 63, 280

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 278

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 209...............................Overheating . 275

............................Specifications . 294.......................................Starting . 177

......Engine Speed Limiter . 179, 183......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 298

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 300...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 19

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 256

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 259...................................Fan, Interior . 108

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 107

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 163Filters

................................Air Cleaner . 225.......................Air Conditioning . 235

...............................................Oil . 211

5-speed Manual Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 222

................................Shifting the . 178.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 74

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 265Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 220..........................................Brake . 223.........................................Clutch . 223

..............Manual Transmission . 222..........................Power Steering . 224

..................Windshield Washer . 219FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 147...........................Folding Rear Seat . 94

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 299..........................Four-way Flashers . 74

.................................................Fuel . 162......................Fill Door and Cap . 163

...........................................Gauge . 67................Octane Requirement . 162

...............................Oxygenated . 298........................Reserve Indicator . 63

........................Tank, Filling the . 163

Index

E

F

III

00/08/10 12:40:57 31S5P600_318

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 284

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 168..........................................Gasohol . 298.........................................Gasoline . 162

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 63...........................................Gauge . 67

................Octane Requirement . 162........................Tank, Filling the . 163

................Gas Station Procedures . 163Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68...............................................Fuel . 67

...............................Speedometer . 66.................................Tachometer . 66

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 180

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 178

..............................Glass Cleaning . 260......................................Glove Box . 101

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 247..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 74

Headlights............Daytime Running Lights . 71

..................High Beam Indicator . 63........................Reminder Beeper . 70

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 250...................................Turning on . 70

..............................Head Restraints . 92.....................Heating and Cooling . 108

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 177.................High-Low Beam Switch . 70..............High-mount Brake Light . 247

....................................Hood Latch . 226.......................Hood, Opening the . 164

..................................................Horn . 69...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 223

.................................Hydroplaning . 194

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 292Ignition

..............................................Keys . 79

...........................................Switch . 82............Timing Control System . 303

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6Indicators, Instrument

.............................................Panel . 59...............................Infant Restraint . 30

Infant Seats.......................Lower Anchorage . 42

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 238

.........................Normal Driving . 239...................................Inside Mirror . 98

.............................Inspection, Tire . 240........................Instrument Panel . 2, 58

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71...........................Interior Cleaning . 258

...............................Interior Lights . 105........................................Introduction . i

........................Jacking up the Car . 265.......................................Jack, Tire . 265

................................Jump Starting . 273

Index

G

H

I

J

IV

00/08/10 12:41:05 31S5P600_319

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 79

...................Neutral Gear Position . 182..................New Vehicle Break-in . 162

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 179

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 292

..................................Maintenance . 195...Owner Maintenance Checks . 207

.................................Record . 205-206......................Required Indicator . 64

..........................................Safety . 196.............................Schedule . 198-204

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 63, 280...................Manual Transmission . 178

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 222...............................Meters, Gauges . 66

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 298..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 99

.........................................Moonroof . 98......................Closing Manually . 283

.....................................Operation . 98

.......................Label, Certification . 292.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 44Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 247.......................................Indicator . 59

.........................................Parking . 70..................................Turn Signal . 72

.....................................Load Limit . 172......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 82

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 82

............................Fuel Fill Door . 163.................................Power Door . 84

...........................................Trunk . 88........................Low Coolant Level . 167.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 63

...........................Lower Anchorage . 42...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 179

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 278

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 294.........................................Luggage . 171

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 162.........................................Odometer . 66

...............................Odometer, Trip . 67Oil

........................Change, How to . 211......................Change, When to . 198......................Checking Engine . 166..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 278

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 210

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 83Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 301..Operation in Foreign Countries . 299

..............................Outside Mirrors . 98....................Overheating, Engine . 275

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 207.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 298

Index

LM

N

O

K

V

00/08/10 12:41:12 31S5P600_320

＊..................................Safety Belts . 8, 44

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 310.................................Safety Features . 7

.........................................Airbags . 10..................................Door Locks . 11

..........................Head Restraints . 11.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55

...............................Safety Messages . ii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 44

...............Additional Information . 44Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 45.....................................Cleaning . 259

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44

..............................Paint Touch-up . 257..............Panel Brightness Control . 71

........................Park Gear Position . 181...........................................Parking . 188

...............................Parking Brake . 100

.................................Parking Lights . 70..Parking Over Things that Burn . 302

.............................PGM-FI System . 301..................Polishing and Waxing . 257

............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19

............................Protecting Adults . 13...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19........................Protecting Children . 21.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.......Protecting Larger Children . 37.........Protecting Small Children . 34

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 41

..........Using Lower Anchorages . 42

...................Radiator Overheating . 275Radio/CD/Cassette

...........Sound System . 116, 128, 140

...................Readiness Codes . 281, 303Rear Lights, Bulb

......................Replacement . 250, 251..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 94

............................Rear View Mirror . 99.................Rear Window Defogger . 74...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 90

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 179.............................Reminder Lights . 59

.......................Remote Transmitter . 85Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 225..........................Engine Coolant . 215

................Engine Oil and Filter . 211..........................................Fuses . 285

................................Light Bulbs . 247....................................Schedule . 198

................................Spark Plugs . 227

................................Timing Belt . 237...........................................Tires . 242

.............................Wiper Blades . 232

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 47

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 167, 213

...............................Restraint, Child . 21..................Reverse Gear Position . 182

................................Rotation, Tire . 241

Index

P R

S

VI

00/08/10 12:41:18 31S5P600_321

＊

CONTINUED

.....................................Tachometer . 66Taillights, Changing

..............................Bulbs in . 250, 251.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 263

...................Tape Player . 122, 135, 155Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296.....Emissions Control Systems . 300

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 298Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 302.......................Temperature Gauge . 68

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 41............................Theft Protection . 159

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 302

................................Maintenance . 46......Reminder Light and Beeper . 61

...................System Components . 44...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16........................Seats, Adjusting the . 90

...............................Serial Number . 292...........................Service Intervals . 198...........................Service Manual . 311

.........Service Station Procedures . 163..........Setting the Clock . 121, 133, 145

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 180........................Shift Lock Release . 184

..............................Side Airbags . 10, 50Side Marker Lights, Bulb

.................Replacement in . 248, 250...............................Signaling Turns . 72

.....................................Snow Tires . 243...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 257

................Sound System . 116, 128, 140Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 264............................Specifications . 295

................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 227....................Specifications Charts . 294

..................................Speed Control . 76

...................................Speedometer . 66.......................................Spotlights . 106

..........SRS, Additional Information . 48...Additional Safety Precautions . 53

.............................Airbag Service . 53How the Side Airbag Indicator

............................Light Works . 52How the SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 51...........How Your Airbags Work . 48

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50........................SRS Components . 48

.............................SRS Indicator . 51, 61....START (Ignition Key Position) . 83

........Testing of Readiness Codes . 303.......................Starting the Engine . 177

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 177

................With a Dead Battery . 273..............State Emissions Testing . 303

........Steam Coming from Engine . 275Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 75.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 82

...Stereo Sound System . 116, 128, 140...........................Storing Your Car . 254

Supplemental Restraint................................System . 10, 48......................................Servicing . 53

.........................SRS Indicator . 51, 61...................System Components . 44

..................................Synthetic Oil . 210

Index

T

VII

00/08/10 12:41:24 31S5P600_322

＊

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 261Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 263....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 296

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 162.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 258

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 212

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 172

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 294....Vehicle Identification Number . 292

.............................Vehicle Storage . 254.....................................Ventilation . 110

.................................................VIN . 292...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 259

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 210

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55

..................Warranty Coverages . 309Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 219.......................................Indicator . 63.....................................Operation . 73

.........................................Washing . 256..................Waxing and Polishing . 257

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 75............Alignment and Balance . 240

..........................Compact Spare . 264......................................Wrench . 265

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 260

..........Time, Setting the . 121, 133, 145....................................Timing Belt . 237....................................Tire Chains . 244

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 265...............................................Tires . 238

..............................Air Pressure . 238.........................Checking Wear . 240..........................Compact Spare . 264

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296......................................Inflation . 238

..................................Inspection . 240..............................Maintenance . 240

...................................Replacing . 242......................................Rotating . 241

...........................................Snow . 243............................Specifications . 295

.......................Traction Devices . 244..................Technical Information . 291...................Tools, Tire Changing . 265

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 194

................Emergency Wrecker . 289...........................Traction Devices . 244

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 220

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 222

..................Fluid Selection . 220, 222..............Identification Number . 293.............Shifting the Automatic . 181

..................Shifting the Manual . 178.....................................Treadwear . 296.......................................Trip Meter . 67

................................................Trunk . 88........................................Opening . 88

...................Open Monitor Light . 63....................................Turn Signals . 72

Index

U

V

W

VIII

00/08/10 12:41:31 31S5P600_323

＊

..................Operating the Power . 96...........................Rear, Defogger . 74

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 72...................................Defroster . 113

.......................................Washers . 73Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 232.....................................Operation . 72

....................................Worn Tires . 240.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 289

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

IX

00/08/10 12:41:34 31S5P600_324

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Brake Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

13.2 US gal (50 , 11.0 Imp gal)

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

3.4 US qt (3.2 , 2.8 Imp qt)

3.7 US qt (3.5 , 3.1 Imp qt)

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )Spare Tire:

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )Front/Rear:

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an API serviceSG, SH or SJ, SAE 10W-30 or10W-40 motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Capacity (including differential):1.6 US qt (1.5 , 1.3 Imp qt)

DX, LX

EX, HX

209

220 224

223

HX model (CVT) only:Use Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) only

222

00/08/10 15:30:13 31S5P600_325

2001 honda civic owner's manual

Documents